# embedding_metadata

key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 After finishing format, the message “COMPLETE” is displayed. 
8.7.2 Output Directory 
8.7.2.1 LCD mounted type CNC 
The output files by this function are output to the current directory. 
8.7.2.2 Stand-alone type CNC (without personal computer function) 
The output files by this function are output to the current directory.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1002 - 
8.7.2.3 Stand-alone type CNC (with personal computer function / 
HSSB connection) 
Set the following output directory before using this function. 
The I/O directory is decided as follows: 
Text data 
1. The case that bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No.300 is set to 1 
Text data is output to the I/O directory specified by CNC screen display function (PC side) 
(Common to memory card and USB memory). 
Setting procedure)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Setting procedure) 
Start up CNC screen display function and select "data I/O" in toolbar "file". 
2. The case that bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No.300 is set to 0 
 Memory card: Text data is output to a memory card on the stand-alone type unit (NC side). 
 USB memory: Text data is output to the I/O directory specified by CNC screen function (PC side). 
SRAM data and User files 
SRAM data and user files are output to the I/O directory specified by NCBOOT (PC side) (Common to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
memory card and USB memory). 
(Setting procedure) 
Select a "Setting" in the pop-up menu in IPL monitor. 
Refer to "APPENDIX F. MAINTENACE OF PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTIONS 
(BOOT-UP AND IPL)" in MAINTENACE MANUAL (B-64695EN) for displaying IPL 
monitor. 
Supported edition 
This application is supported in the following editions. 
- CNC screen display function (HSSB version): Edition 4.2 or later 
- NCBOOT (HSSB version): Edition 4.6 or later


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This function cannot be operated normally if one of these applications is not supported. 
NOTE 
1 SRAM data and user files are output to the I/O directory specified by NCBOOT 
(PC side) regardless of bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No.300. 
2 When the I/O directory specified by CNC screen display function (PC side) is 
different from that specified by NCBOOT (PC side), the output directories of 
"Text data" and "SRAM data and User files" differ from each other.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 1003 - 
8.7.2.4 Stand-alone type CNC (with personal computer function / 
Ethernet connection) 
NOTE 
 USB function cannot be used on stand-alone type CNC with personal computer 
function (Ethernet connection). 
Set the following output directory before using this function. 
The I/O directory is decided as follows: 
Text data 
Memory card: 
- Bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No.300 is set to 1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Text data is output to the I/O directory specified by CNC screen display function (PC side). 
Setting procedure) 
Start up CNC screen display function and select "data I/O" in toolbar "file". 
- Bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No.300 is set to 0 
 Text data is output to a memory card on the stand-alone type unit (NC side). 
 
USB memory: 
Not available. 
SRAM data and User files 
Memory card: 
SRAM data and user files are output to a memory card on the stand-alone type unit (NC side).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The I/O directory specified by NCBOOTE is ignored. 
USB memory: 
Not available. 
NOTE 
 SRAM data and user files are output to a memory card on the stand-alone type 
unit (NC side) regardless of bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No.300.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1004 - 
8.7.3 List of Output Data 
8.7.3.1 Text data 
Text data shown in Table 8.7.3.1 (a) are output. 
In case of data for each path, text data for all paths are output. 
Table 8.7.3.1 (a) Text data list 
Data kind File name Path Optional 
function 
Tool offset TOOLOFST.TXT ○
Parameter CNC_PARA.TXT 
PMC parameter PMCn_PRM.TXT (n: path number) 
PMC parameter (Dual Check Safety) PMCS_PRM.TXT ○
Program ALL-FLDR.TXT


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Program ALL-FLDR.TXT 
Pitch error compensation data PITCH.TXT ○
Custom macro common variable MACRO.TXT ○ ○
Workpiece coordinate system data EXT_WKZ.TXT ○ ○
M code group data MC-GROUP.TXT ○ ○
Operation history data OPRT_HIS.TXT 
Maintenance information MAINTINF.TXT 
Periodic maintenance data MAINTENA.TXT 
Second geometry tool offset SEC_GEOM.TXT ○ ○
Real time custom macro variable RTMMACRO.TXT ○ ○
System configuration data SYS-CONF.TXT 
PMC signal protect DIDOENBL.TXT ○ ○


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Attachment history data (tool management tool 
attachment/detachment function) TLATAHIS.TXT ○
Detachment history data (tool management tool 
attachment/detachment function) TLDTAHIS.TXT ○
Servo/spindle information SV_SP_ID.TXT 
Tool geometry data (Interference check for each 
path) TOOL-FRM.TXT 
○ ○
Machine system name data MAINTEMC.TXT 
P code variable PCODE.TXT ○ ○
Tool geometry size data TOOLSIZE.TXT ○ ○
CNC ID information CNCIDNUM.TXT 
Operation history signal section data OHIS_SIG.TXT


key: chroma:document
string_value:
System alarm information SYS_ALM.TXT 
All tool data (Tool management function) AL_TLMGR.TXT ○ ○
All custom data (Tool management function) AL_TLCSM.TXT ○
Tool life management data TOOLLIFE.TXT ○ ○
Machine state history data MSRHSTRY.TXT ○
Network setting information NETWORK.MEM 
NOTE 
1 The kinds of output text data are depended on the option setting. 
2 The text data which is output by this function can be input on the screen of each


key: chroma:document
string_value:
function. Program file “ALL-FLDR.TXT” can be input by using the operation of 
inputting all programs and folders on the ALL IO screen. 
In case of data for each path, the extension shown in Table 8.7.3.1 (b) is added.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 1005 - 
Table 8.7.3.1 (b) Additional extension to path data 
Path number Extension 
1 TXT 
2 P-2 
8.7.3.2 SRAM data and User files 
SRAM data and all data in FROM are output by this function. 
The examples of the output file are as follows. 
Table 8.7.3.2 User file list 
File kind File name Remarks 
Option information OPRM_INF.000 
PMC sequence program PMCn.000 n: Path number 
PMC sequence program for Dual Check 
Safety 
PMCS.000


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Safety 
PMCS.000 
PMC multi-language message MnPMCMSG n: Path number 
C-language executer application data CEX_nnM.000 nn: Either 05, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 
60, 70, 80, 90 or A0 
C-language executer user data file CEXnxxxx.000 n: numeric character 
x: alphanumeric character 
Macro executer application data PDnnxxxx.000 n: P-CODE number 
xxxx: Data size 
FANUC PICTURE application data FPF_20M.000 
FANUC PICTURE screen data FPF0xx.000 xx: Data size (unit of 128KB, decimal number)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Machine operation menu data EXSFTKEY.000 
I/O configuration IOCONF.000 
Machine alarm diagnosis data TDG-DATA.000 
NOTE 
 The kinds of output user files are depended on the option setting. 
8.7.4 List of Message 
8.7.4.1 Warning message 
The following message is displayed, when an error occurs by an operation on all data output screen. 
Table 8.7.4.1 Warning message list 
Warning message Description 
MEMORY CARD IS NOT READY. The memory card is not mounted. 
Mount the memory card.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Mount the memory card. 
USB MEMORY IS NOT MOUNTING The USB memory is not mounted. 
Mount the USB memory. 
THE MACHINE IS UNDER USE The I/O device is used by other functions. 
CHANGE TO EDIT MODE Select the EDIT mode. 
PLEASE RELEASE EMERGENCY STOP Cancel emergency stop state for all paths. 
PARAMETER SETTING ERROR The I/O device could not be accessed.
Set the following parameters. 
Parameter (No.0020) = 4 or 17 
Parameter IO4(No.110#0) = 0 
Parameter MDP(No.138#0) = 1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameter MDP(No.138#0) = 1 
OUTPUT ERROR(PMC PARAM The error occurred while outputting PMC parameter. 
FORMAT ERROR The format cannot be executed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1006 - 
8.7.4.2 Error message 
If the error occurred while outputting SRAM data or user files, the following error message is displayed 
on IPL screen. 
Table 8.7.4.2 Error message list 
Error message Description 
DEVICE NOT READY The I/O device is not ready. 
DEVICE FULL The capacity of the I/O device is insufficient. 
DEVICE PROTECTED The I/O device is write–protected. 
DEVICE NOT MOUNTED The I/O device could not be mounted.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FILE PROTECTED The file is write–protected. 
CANCELED The output operation is canceled. 
DIRECTORY FULL The file could not be generated in the root directory for the I/O 
device. 
Reduce the number of files in root directory. 
8.8 INPUT/OUTPUT FILE NAME FOR MULTI-PATH SYSTEM 
This function is used to add the path number to the extension of the input/output file. 
This function can manage the files easily for each path. 
This function is available when bit 0 (MDP) of parameter No.138 is set to 1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE 
 This function is available only when input/output is executed by not specifying 
the file name but using default file name. 
 If the file name is specified, this function is unavailable. In that case, the 
specified file name is used for input/output and the path number is not added. 
Explanation 
- About extension 
When bit 0 (MDP) of parameter No.138 is set to 1, the path number is added to the extension of the 
default file name. 
The extension of each path is as follows.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Table 8.8 (a) Extension of default file name 
Path number Extension 
1 TXT 
2 P-2 
NOTE 
 The extension of the loader path 1 is “PL1” and the loader path 2 is ”PL2”. 
Example) In case of offset data, the default file name is as follows. 
Table 8.8 (b) Input/output filename of offset data 
Path number Default file name 
Parameter MDP=0 Parameter MDP=1 
1 TOOLOFST.TXT TOOLOFST.TXT 
2 TOOLOFST.TXT TOOLOFST.P-2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 1007 - 
- Target data 
This function is available only for path individual data. The path number is not added for path common 
data by this function. 
- Part program 
This function is available for the part program. 
The extension of each path is as follows. 
Table 8.8 (c) Extension of part program 
Path number Extension 
1 Nothing 
2 P-2 
NOTE 
 The extension of the loader path 1 is “PL1” and the loader path 2 is ”PL2”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Example) When the part program “O0001” is input/output, the file name is as follows. 
Table 8.8 (d) Input/output file name of part program 
Path number File name 
Parameter MDP=0 Parameter MDP=1 
1 O0001 O0001 
2 O0001 O0001.P-2 
NOTE 
 If the file name is specified, the path number is not added. 
 For example, when “O0001” is output by using [F SET] on second path, the 
output file name is “O0001”. It is not “O0001.P-2”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1008 -
9 CREATING PROGRAMS
This chapter explains how to create programs by MDI of the CNC.
This chapter also explains automatic insertion of sequence numbers and how to create programs in 
TEACH IN mode.
 Creation/registration
Program creation
Editing
Management
Output Execution
Creating programs using MDI unit .........................See III-9.1
Automatic insertion of sequence numbers.............See III-9.2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Creating programs in TEACH IN mode..................See III-9.3
Program 
registration
Registration from external input..........................See III-8.2.1
9.1 CREATING PROGRAMS USING THE MDI UNIT
Programs can be created in the EDIT mode using functions described in Section, ”EDITING 
PROGRAMS”.
Procedure for Creating Programs Using the MDI Unit
1 Enter the EDIT mode.
2 Press the key.
3 Press address key and enter the program number.
4 Press the editing key or .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press the editing key or .
5 Create a program using the program editing functions described in III-10.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 9. CREATING PROGRAMS
- 1009 -
Explanation
- Comments in a program
Comments can be written in a program using the control in/out codes.
Example) O0001 (TEST PROGRAM) ; 
M08 (COOLANT ON) ;
• When the editing key or is pressed after the control-out code "(", comments, and 
control-in code ")" have been typed, the typed comments are registered.
• When the editing key or is pressed midway through comments, to enter the rest of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
comments later, the data typed before the editing key or is pressed may not be 
correctly registered (not entered, modified, or lost) because the data is subject to an entry check 
which is performed in normal editing.
• Control-out code "(" or Control-in code ")" cannot be registered by itself.
9.2 AUTOMATIC INSERTION OF SEQUENCE NUMBERS
Sequence numbers can be automatically inserted in each block when a program is created using the MDI 
keys in the EDIT mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
keys in the EDIT mode.
Set the increment for sequence numbers in parameter No. 3216.
Procedure for automatic insertion of sequence numbers
Procedure
1 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for "SEQUENCE NO." in setting data. (see Subsection, 
“Displaying and Entering Setting Data”).
2 Enter the EDIT mode.
3 Press key to display the program screen.
4 Search for or register the number of a program to be edited and move the cursor to the EOB (;) of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
block after which automatic insertion of sequence numbers is started.
When a program number is registered and an EOB (;) is entered with the editing key or 
, sequence numbers are automatically inserted starting with 0. Change the initial value, if 
required, according to step 10, then skip to step 7.
5 Press address key and enter the initial value of N.
6 Press the editing key or .
7 Enter each word of a block.
8 Press key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8 Press key.
9 Press the editing key or . The EOB is registered in memory and sequence numbers are 
automatically inserted. For example, if the initial value of N is 10 and the parameter for the 
increment is set to 2, N12 inserted and displayed below the line where a new block is specified.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1010 -
Fig. 9.2
10 In the example above, if N12 is not necessary in the next block, pressing the key after N12 is 
displayed deletes N12.
If wishing to insert N100, not N12, into the next block, type N100 immediately after N12 is 
displayed, and press . This causes N100 to be registered and the initial value to be changed to 
100.
9.3 CREATING PROGRAMS IN TEACH IN MODE 
(PLAYBACK)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(PLAYBACK)
In the TEACH IN JOG or TEACH IN HANDLE mode, you can create a program while inserting the 
coordinate of the current position along each axis in the absolute coordinate system when the tool is 
moved by manual operation into the program.
You can input the words other than axis names in the same way as in the EDIT mode.
Program screen in the TEACH IN JOG mode
Displayed items
In the TEACH IN JOG or TEACH IN HANDLE MODE, the following program screen is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
On the left of the screen, the coordinates of the current position in the absolute and relative coordinate 
systems are displayed; on the right of the screen, the contents of a program are displayed. You can create 
a program while checking the current position by manual operation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 9. CREATING PROGRAMS
- 1011 -
Fig. 9.3 (a) Program screen in the TEACH IN JOG mode
Inputting the coordinates of the current position
You can use the following procedure to insert the coordinate of the current position along each axis in the 
absolute coordinate system:
1 Select the TEACH IN JOG mode or TEACH IN HANDLE mode.
2 Press key to display the program screen. Search for or register the number of a program to be


key: chroma:document
string_value:
edited and move the cursor to the position where the current position along each axis is to be 
inserted.
3 Move the tool to the desired position with jog or handle.
4 Key in the axis name of an axis along which you want to insert the coordinate of the current 
position.
5 Press the editing key or . Then, the coordinate of the current position along the 
specified axis is inserted in the program.
(Example) X10.521 Coordinate of the current position
X10521 Data inserted in the program
Example


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Example
O1234 ;
G92 X10000 Y0 Z10000 ;
G00 G90 X3025 Y23723 ;
G01 Z-325 F300 ;
M02 ;
X
Z
Y
P0
(10.0, 0, 10.0)
P1
P2
(3.025, 23.723, 10.0)
(3.025, 23.723, -0.325)
Fig. 9.3 (b)
1 Select the TEACH IN HANDLE mode.
2 Make positioning at position P0 by the manual pulse generator.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1012 -
3 Select the program screen.
4 Enter program number O1234 as follows:
O 1 2 3 4
This operation input program number O1234 in memory.
Next, press the following keys:
An EOB (;) is entered after program number O1234. 
5 Enter the P0 machine position for data of the first block as follows:
G 9 2 X Y Z
This operation registers G92X10000Y0Z10000; in program.
6 Position the tool at P1 with the manual pulse generator.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 Enter the P1 machine position for data of the second block as follows:
G 0 0 G 9 0 X Y
This operation input G00G90X3025Z23723; in program.
8 Position the tool at P2 with the manual pulse generator.
9 Enter the P2 machine position for data of the third block as follows:
G 0 1 Z F 3 0 0
This operation input G01Z -325F300; in program.
10 Input M02; in program as follows:
M 0 2
This completes the registration of the sample program.
Explanation
- Registering a position with compensation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When an axis name and a numeric value are keyed in and the editing key or is pressed, the 
value keyed in is added to the absolute coordinate of the current position and the coordinate is inserted. 
This operation allows insertion of a corrected value for the absolute coordinate position.
When an extended axis name is used and the name ends with a numeric value, insert an equal sign (=) 
between the axis name and numeric value.
- Registering commands other than position commands


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Commands to be entered before and after a position command must be entered before and after the 
machine position is registered, by using the same operation as program editing in EDIT mode.
- Calculator-type input
When the calculator-type input format is disabled (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 0), the 
coordinate of the current position is inserted into the program in least input increments. When the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
calculator-type input format is enabled (the bit is set to 1), the coordinate is inserted with a decimal point.
(Example)
Coordinate of the current position X10.521
At this time, the X-axis coordinate is inserted into the program as follows:
When the calculator-type input format is disabled X10521
When the calculator-type input format is enabled X10.521


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 9. CREATING PROGRAMS
- 1013 -
9.4 CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING WITH GRAPHIC 
FUNCTION
NC programs can be created on a block-by-block basis, viewing the displayed G code menu screen and G 
code details screen.
Procedure for Conversational Programming with Graphic Function
Procedure 1: Creating a program
1 Enter the EDIT mode.
2 Press function key . If no program is registered, the following screen is displayed.
Fig. 9.4 (a) Program screen (with no program registered)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If a program is registered, the program currently selected is displayed.
Fig. 9.4 (b) Program screen (with a program registered)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1014 -
3 Key in the program number of a program to be registered after keying in address O, then press 
key. For example, when a program with program number 10 is to be registered, key in O10 , then 
press key. This registers a new program O0010.
4 Press the [C.A.P] soft key. The following G code menu is displayed on the screen. (If the [C.A.P] 
soft key is not displayed, hold down the rightmost continuous menu key or the leftmost return


key: chroma:document
string_value:
menu key until the [C.A.P] soft key is displayed.)
Fig. 9.4 (c) G code menu screen
5 Select the G code corresponding to a function to be programmed by a cursor. When the positioning 
function is desired, for example, the G code menu lists the function with the G code G00. So select
G00. If the screen does not indicate a function to be programmed, press the or page 
key to display the next G code menu screen. Repeat this operation until a desired function appears. If


key: chroma:document
string_value:
a desired function is not a G code, select “STANDARD FORMAT”.
6 Press the soft key [SELECT] or key to display a detailed screen for a selected G code. The 
figure below shows an example of detailed screen for G00.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 9. CREATING PROGRAMS
- 1015 -
Fig. 9.4 (d) G code details screen (G00)
When “STANDARD FORMAT” is selected, the standard details screen is displayed.
Fig. 9.4 (e) G code details screen (standard details screen)
7 Move the cursor to the block to be modified on the program screen. If the address where the cursor
is placed on the program side is present on the figure side, the address on the figure side blinks.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8 Enter numeric data by pressing the numeric keys and press the [INPUT] soft key or key. This 
completes the input of one data item.
9 By repeating steps 7 and 8 above, enter all data necessary for the G code keyed in step 5 above.
10 Press the [INSERT] soft key or the key. This completes the registration of data of one block 
in program memory. On the screen, the G code menu screen is displayed, allowing the user to enter 
data for another block. Repeat the procedure starting with 5 as required.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11 After registering all programs, press the [C.A.P. END] soft key. The registered programs are 
converted to the conversational format and displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1016 -
12 Press the key to return to the program head.
Procedure 2: Modifying a block
1 Move the cursor to the block to be modified on the program screen and press the [C.A.P] soft key. 
Or, press the [C.A.P] soft key first to display the conversational screen, then press the or 
page key until the block to be modified is displayed.
2 When data other than a G code is to be altered, just move the cursor to the data and key in a desired


key: chroma:document
string_value:
value, then press the [INPUT] soft key or key.
3 When a G code is to be altered, press the menu return key and the soft key [G.MENU]. Then 
the G code menu appears. Select a desired G code by the cursor, then key in the value. For example, 
to specify a cutting feed, since the G code menu indicates G01, select G01. Then press the soft key 
[SELECT] or the key. The detailed screen of the G code is displayed, so enter the data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 After data is changed completely, press the [ALTER] soft key or the key. This operation 
replaces an entire block of a program.
Procedure 3: Inserting a block
1 On the conversational screen, display the block immediately before a new block is to be inserted, by 
using the or page key. On the program screen, move the cursor with the page keys and 
cursor keys to immediately before the point where a new block is to be inserted.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the soft key [G.MENU] to display the G code menu. Then enter new block data.
3 When input of one block of data is completed in step 2, press the [INSERT] soft key or the 
key. This operation inserts a block of data.
Procedure 4: Deleting a block
1 On the conversational screen, display the contents of a block to be deleted, then press the [DELETE] 
soft key or the key.
2 The [YES] and [NO] soft keys are displayed. Press the [YES] soft key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 The contents of the block displayed are deleted from program memory. Then the contents of the next 
block are displayed on the conversational screen.
Notes
With a machining center system, the names of the basic three axes are X, Y, and Z at all times.
With a lath system, the names of the basic two axes are X and Z at all times.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1017 - 
10 EDITING PROGRAMS 
This chapter describes how to edit programs registered in the CNC. Editing includes the insertion, 
modification, and deletion of words. Editing also includes deletion of the entire program and automatic 
insertion of sequence numbers. In addition, PC-like program text copy and move operations are possible. 
This chapter also describes program search, sequence number search, word search, and address search,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
which are performed before editing the program. 
1) Program search ................................................................ See III-10.5. 
2) Sequence number search ................................................ See III-10.6. 
3) Word search .................................................................. See III-10.2.1. 
4) Address search.............................................................. See III-10.2.1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1) Inserting, altering, and deleting a word........... See III-10.2.3 to 10.2.5. 
2) Replacing word or address............................................... See III-10.3. 
2) Deleting blocks ................................................................. See III-10.4. 
3) Deleting programs ........................................................... See III-10.7. 
4) Editing characters............................................................See III-10.11. 
Search for part 
of program to be


key: chroma:document
string_value:
of program to be 
edited 
Editing and 
deleting programs 
Management 
Output Execution
Creation and 
registration 
Editing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1018 - 
10.1 EDIT DISABLE ATTRIBUTE AND DISPLAY DISABLE 
ATTRIBUTE 
Before a program can be edited, the edit disable attribute and display disable attribute must be removed. 
The edit disable attribute and display disable attribute can be set for each program and folder. 
Programs with the edit disable attribute or display disable attribute, and programs in folders with the edit 
disable attribute or display disable attribute cannot be edited.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure for removing the edit disable attribute 
1 Select EDIT mode. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [DETAIL ON]. 
6 Move the cursor to the program or folder from which you want to remove the edit disable attribute. 
7 Press the soft key [CHANGE ATTR]. 
8 Press the soft key [EDIT ENABLE]. 
9 Press the soft key [END]. 
 CAUTION 
1 After completing editing, set the edit disable attribute as necessary.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 To set the edit disable attribute, follow the same procedure as for removing the 
attribute. 
In the step 8, press the soft key [EDIT DISABL]. 
Procedure for removing the display disable attribute 
1 Select MDI mode. 
2 Set the same value as the password (parameter No. 3210 (PSW)) in parameter No. 3211 (KEY) to 
release protection of programs. 
3 Select EDIT mode. 
4 Press the function key . 
5 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. 
6 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
7 Press the soft key [DETAIL ON].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8 Move the cursor to the program or folder from which you want to remove the display disable 
attribute. 
9 Press the soft key [CHANGE ATTR]. 
10 Press the soft key [DISP ENABLE]. 
11 Press the soft key [END]. 
 CAUTION 
1 After completing editing, set the display disable attribute as necessary. 
2 To set the display disable attribute, perform steps 1 to 9 of the procedure for 
removing the attribute and press soft key [DISP DISABL] in step 10. Then, set


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameter No. 3210 (PSW) to a value other than 0 that is not the value set in 
parameter No. 3211 (KEY). The program or folder is not displayed in any list 
screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1019 - 
10.2 INSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A WORD 
This section outlines the procedure for inserting, altering, and deleting a word in a program registered in 
memory. 
Procedure for inserting, altering and deleting a word 
1 Select EDIT mode. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Select a program to be edited. 
 If a program to be edited is selected, perform the operation 4. 
 If a program to be edited is not selected, search for the program number.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Move the cursor to the position to be edited, with one of the methods below. 
• Scan method 
• Word search method 
• Address search method 
For each method, refer to Subsection, “Word Search”. 
5 Perform an operation such as altering, inserting, or deleting a word. 
Explanation 
 - Concept of word and editing unit 
A word is an address followed by a number. With a custom macro, the concept of word is ambiguous. 
So the editing unit is considered here.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The editing unit is a unit subject to alteration or deletion in one operation. In one scan operation, the 
cursor indicates the start of an editing unit. 
An insertion is made after an editing unit. 
Definition of editing unit 
• Program portion from an address to immediately before the next address 
• An address is an alphabet, IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO=, or ; (EOB). 
According to this definition, a word is an editing unit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The word "word," when used in the description of editing, means an editing unit according to the precise 
definition. 
 CAUTION 
 When a change, insertion, or deletion was performed on data of a program by 
pausing machining with the single block stop, feed hold, or other operations 
during execution of a program, be sure to return the cursor to the original position 
before restarting the program. To execute the program with the cursor positioned 
at another position, be sure to make a reset.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Otherwise, the program may not be executed as expected from the program 
shown on the screen after machining restarts.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1020 - 
10.2.1 Word Search 
A word can be searched for by merely moving the cursor through the text (scanning), by word search, or 
by address search. 
Procedure for scanning a program 
1 Press the cursor key . 
 The cursor moves forward word by word; the cursor is displayed at a selected word. 
2 Press the cursor key . 
 The cursor moves backward word by word; the cursor is displayed at a selected word. 
 Example: Scanning Z1250.0 
Fig. 10.2.1 (a)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 10.2.1 (a) 
3 Holding down the cursor key or scans words continuously. 
4 The first word of the next block is searched for when the cursor key is pressed. 
5 The first word of the previous block is searched for when the cursor key is pressed. 
6 Holding down the cursor key or moves the cursor to the head of a block continuously. 
7 Pressing the page key displays the next page and searches for the first word of the page.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8 Pressing the page key displays the previous page and searches for the first word of the page. 
9 Holding down the page key or displays one page after another. 
Procedure for searching a word 
Example of searching for S12 
Fig. 10.2.1 (b) 
1 Press soft key [SEARCH]. 
2 Key in address S . 
N01234 is being searched 
for/scanned currently. 
S12 is searched for.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1021 - 
3 Key in 1 2 . 
• S12 cannot be searched for if only S1 is keyed in. 
• S09 cannot be searched for by keying in only S9. 
 To search for S09, be sure to key in S09. 
4 Pressing soft key [↓ SEARCH] starts searching forward from the cursor position. Pressing [↑
SEARCH] starts searching backward. 
5 To search for the same word successively, press [↓ SEARCH] or [↑ SEARCH]. 
Procedure for searching an address 
Example of searching for M03


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Example of searching for M03 
Fig. 10.2.1 (c) 
1 Pressing the [SEARCH] key 
2 Key in address M . 
3 Pressing soft key [↓ SEARCH] starts searching forward from the cursor position. Pressing [↑
SEARCH] starts searching backward. 
4 To search for the same word successively, press [↓ SEARCH] or [↑ SEARCH]. 
10.2.2 Heading a Program 
The cursor can be jumped to the top of a program. This function is called heading the program pointer.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This section describes the four methods for heading the program pointer. 
Procedure for heading a program 
Method 1 
1 Press key when the program screen is selected in EDIT mode. When the cursor has 
returned to the start of the program, the contents of the program are displayed from its start on 
the screen. 
Method 2 Search for the program number. 
1 When the program screen is selected in MEMORY or EDIT mode, enter a program number or 
program name.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
program name. 
When entering a program number, press address key O then type the program number.
2 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH]. 
Method 3 
1 Select the program screen or program check screen in MEMORY mode. 
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 
3 Press soft key [REWIND]. 
N01234 is being searched 
for/scanned currently. 
M03 is searched for.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1022 - 
Method 4 
1 Select the program screen in EDIT mode. 
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 
3 Press soft key [LINE SEARCH]. 
4 Press soft key [TOP]. 
10.2.3 Inserting a Word 
Procedure for inserting a word 
1 Search for or scan the word immediately before a word to be inserted. 
2 Key in an address to be inserted. 
3 Key in data. 
4 Press the editing key or . 
Example of Inserting T15 
1 Search for or scan Z1250. 
Fig. 10.2.3 (a) 
2 Key in T 1 5 .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Key in T 1 5 . 
3 Press the editing key or . 
Fig. 10.2.3 (b) 
10.2.4 Altering a Word 
Procedure for altering a word 
1 Search for or scan a word to be altered. 
2 Key in an address to be inserted. 
3 Key in data. 
4 Press the editing key . 
Z1250.0 is searched 
for/scanned. 
T15 is inserted.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1023 - 
Example of changing T15 to M15 
1 Search for or scan T15. 
Fig. 10.2.4 (a) 
2 Key in M 1 5 . 
3 Press the editing key . 
Fig. 10.2.4 (b) 
10.2.5 Deleting a Word 
Procedure for deleting a word 
1 Search for or scan a word to be deleted. 
2 Press the editing . 
Example of deleting X100.0 
1 Search for or scan X100.0. 
Fig. 10.2.5 (a) 
2 Press the editing . 
Fig. 10.2.5 (b) 
T15 is searched for/scanned. 
T15 is changed to M15.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1024 - 
10.3 REPLACING A WORD OR ADDRESS 
Replace the specified word or address in a program at a time. 
The following methods are available: Replacement after checking each found character string and batch 
replacement without checking any found character string. 
Procedure for replacing a word or address 
 - Replacing a word or address after checking each found character string 
1 Move the cursor to the position from which to start replacement.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press soft key [REPLCE]. 
3 Enter a word or address before replacement. 
4 Press soft key [BEFORE]. 
5 Enter a word or address after replacement. 
6 Press soft key [AFTER]. 
7 Press soft key [↑ SEARCH] or [↓ SEARCH]. The word or address is searched for in the direction of 
the arrow. 
8 Press soft key [REPLCE] to replace the character string at the cursor and search for the match. 
If you want to search for the next match without replacing the character string at the cursor, press


key: chroma:document
string_value:
soft key [↑ SEARCH] or [↓ SEARCH]. 
9 Repeat step 8 until required replacement is terminated. 
To terminate replacement during operation, press soft key [END]. 
 - Replacing a word or address without checking any found character string 
1 Move the cursor to the position from which to start replacement. 
2 Press soft key [REPLCE]. 
3 Enter a word or address before replacement. 
4 Press soft key [BEFORE]. 
5 Enter a word or address after replacement. 
6 Press soft key [AFTER].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Press soft key [AFTER]. 
7 Press soft key [↑ SEARCH] or [↓ SEARCH]. The word or address is searched for in the direction of 
the arrow. 
8 Press soft key [REPLCE ALL]. 
9 To cancel replace all operation, press soft key [NO]. 
 To execute replace all operation, press soft key [YES]. The word or address is searched for from the 
cursor position in the direction of the arrow in the soft key pressed in step 7 and all found character


key: chroma:document
string_value:
strings are replaced at a time. Replace all operation is performed to the beginning of the program for 
upward replacement or to the end of the program for downward replacement. 
NOTE 
1 Any character string containing EOB cannot be specified as the character string 
before or after replacement. 
2 Pressing soft key [REPLCE ALL] during replacement with checking each found 
character string allows replacement without checking the following found 
character strings to start.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1025 - 
10.4 DELETING BLOCKS 
A block or blocks can be deleted in a program. 
10.4.1 Deleting a Block 
The portion from the current word position to the next EOB is deleted. The cursor is then placed in the 
word next to the deleted EOB. 
Procedure for deleting a block 
1 Search for or scan address N for a block to be deleted. 
2 Press the key.
3 Press the editing key .
Example of deleting a block of N01234 
1 Search for or scan N01234.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Search for or scan N01234. 
Fig. 10.4.1 (a) 
2 Press the key.
3 Press the editing key .
Fig. 10.4.1 (b) 
10.4.2 Deleting Multiple Blocks 
The several blocks in the forward direction from the current word position up to the EOB of the farthest 
of those blocks are deleted. The cursor is then placed in the word next to the deleted EOB. 
Procedure for deleting blocks 
1 Search for or scan a word in the first block of a portion to be deleted.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the key as many times as the number of blocks that you want to delete. 
3 Press the editing key .
N01234 is searched 
for/scanned. 
Block containing N01234 
has been deleted.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1026 - 
Example of deleting blocks from N01234 to the EOB of a block which is two blocks 
ahead 
1 Search for or scan N01234. 
Fig. 10.4.2 (a) 
2 Press . 
3 Press the editing key .
Fig. 10.4.2 (b) 
10.5 PROGRAM SEARCH 
When memory holds multiple programs, a program can be searched for. There are four methods as 
follows. 
Procedure for program search 
Procedure 
Method 1 1 Select EDIT or MEMORY mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press function key to display the program screen. 
 3 Enter a program number or program name. When entering a program number, press 
address key then type the program number. 
 4 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH]. Alternatively, press the cursor key or 
. 
 5 Upon completion of search operation, the program number searched for is displayed in 
the upper-right corner of the screen 
 If the program is not found, alarm PS0071 occurs. 
Method 2 1 Select EDIT or MEMORY mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press function key to display the program screen. 
 3 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH]. 
 4 Then, press soft key [PREV PROGRM] or [NEXT PROGRM]. 
Pressing [PREV PROGRM] searches for the previous program on the folder, and pressing 
[NEXT PROGRM] searches for the next program. 
N01234 is searched 
for/scanned.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1027 - 
Method 3 This method searches for the program number (0001 to 0031) corresponding to a signal 
on the machine tool side to start automatic operation. Refer to the relevant manual 
prepared by the machine tool builder for detailed information on operation. 
 1 Select MEMORY mode. 
2 Set the reset state. 
- The reset state is the state where the LED for indicating that automatic operation is in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
progress is off. (Refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder.) 
 3 Set the program number selection signal on the machine tool side to a number from 01 to 
31. 
 4 Press the cycle start button. 
- When the signal on the machine tool side represents 00, program number search 
operation is not performed. 
- If the program corresponding to a signal on the machine tool side is not registered, 
alarm DS0059 is raised.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
alarm DS0059 is raised. 
Method 4 When bit 4 (PGS) of parameter No. 11308 is 1, search for an O number program by 
specifying digits only. 
 1 Select EDIT or MEMORY mode. 
 2 Press function key to display the program screen. 
 3 Enter the digits of a program number. Address key need not be pressed before the 
digits. 
 4 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH]. Alternatively, press the cursor key or 
. 
 Example 
 - When bit 4 (PGS) of parameter No. 11308 is 1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Specify "1000" → Search for program O1000. 
 Specify "ABC" → Search for program ABC. 
 - When bit 4 (PGS) of parameter No. 11308 is 0 
 Specify "1000" → Search for program 1000. 
 Specify "ABC" → Search for program ABC. 
 When bit 4 (PGS) of parameter No. 11308 is 1, it is not possible to search for a program 
with any name consisting of digits only. 
10.6 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH 
Sequence number search operation is usually used to search for a sequence number in the middle of a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
program so that execution can be started or restarted at the block of the sequence number. 
Example) Sequence number 02346 in a program (O0002) is searched for. 
PROGRAM
O0001 ;
N01234 X100.0 Z100.0 ;
S12 ;
 : 
O0002 ; N02345 X20.0 Z20.0 ; N02346 X10.0 Z10.0 ; :
O0003 ;
 :
Selected program 
Target sequence 
number is found.
This section is searched 
starting at the beginning. 
(Search operation is 
performed only within a 
program.)
Fig. 10.6 (a)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1028 - 
Procedure for sequence number search 
Procedure 
1 Select MEMORY mode. 
2 Press function key . 
3 If the program contains a sequence number to be searched for, perform the operations 4 to 7 below. 
 If the program does not contain a sequence number to be searched for, select the program number of 
the program that contains the sequence number to be searched for. 
4 Press address key . 
5 Key in a sequence number to be searched for.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Press soft key [N SRH]. 
7 Upon completion of search operation, the sequence number searched for is displayed in the 
upper-right corner of the screen. 
 If the specified sequence number is not found in the program currently selected, alarm PS0060 
occurs. 
Explanation 
 - Operation during Search 
Those blocks that are skipped do not affect the CNC. This means that the data in the skipped blocks such 
as coordinates and M, S, and T codes does not alter the CNC coordinates and modal values.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
So, in the first block where execution is to be started or restarted by using a sequence number search 
command, be sure to enter required M, S, and T codes and coordinates. A block searched for by sequence 
number search usually represents a point of shifting from one process to another. When a block in the 
middle of a process must be searched for to restart execution at the block, specify M, S, and T codes, G


key: chroma:document
string_value:
codes, coordinates, and so forth as required from the MDI after closely checking the machine tool and NC 
states at that point. 
 - Checking during search 
During search operation, the following checks are made: 
• Optional block skip 
Limitation 
 - Searching in sub-program 
During sequence number search operation, M98Pxxxx (subprogram call) is not executed. So an alarm 
PS0060 is raised if an attempt is made to search for a sequence number in a subprogram called by the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
program currently selected. 
O1234
 :
 :
M98 P5678 ;
 :
 : 
Main program Subprogram
O5678
 :
N88888
 :
M99 ;
 :
If an attempt is made to search for N8888 in the example above, an alarm occurs.
Fig. 10.6 (b)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1029 - 
10.7 DELETING PROGRAMS 
Programs registered in memory can be deleted, either one program by one program or all at once. 
10.7.1 Deleting One Program 
A single program in the folder containing the program currently being edited can be deleted. 
Procedure for deleting one program 
1 Select the EDIT mode. 
2 Press function key to display the program screen. 
3 Press address key . 
4 Key in a desired program number.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Press the editing key . The program with the entered program number is deleted. 
10.7.2 Deleting All Programs 
All programs in the folder containing the program currently being edited can be deleted. 
Procedure for deleting all programs 
1 Select the EDIT mode. 
2 Press function key to display the program screen. 
3 Press address key . 
4 Key in -9999. 
5 Press editing key to delete all programs.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1030 - 
10.8 EDITING OF CUSTOM MACROS 
Unlike ordinary programs, custom macro programs are modified, inserted, or deleted based on editing 
units. 
Custom macro words can be entered in abbreviated form. 
Comments can be entered in a program. 
Refer to the Section, “CREATING PROGRAMS USING THE MDI UNIT” for the comments of a 
program. 
Explanation 
 - Editing unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation 
 - Editing unit 
When editing a custom macro already entered, the user can move the cursor to each editing unit that starts 
with any of the following characters and symbols: 
(a) Address 
(b) # located at the start of the left side of a substitution statement 
(c) /, (,=, and ; 
(d) First character of IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO, POPEN, BPRNT, DPRNT and PCLOS 
On the screen, a blank is placed before each of the above characters and symbols.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Example) Head positions where the cursor is placed 
 N001 X-#100 ; 
 #1 =123 ; 
 N002 /2 X[12/#3] ; 
 N003 X-SQRT[#3/3*[#4+1]] ; 
 N004 X-#2 Z#1 ; 
 N005 #5 =1+2-#10 ; 
 IF[#1NE0] GOTO10 ; 
 WHILE[#2LE5] DO1 ; 
 #[200+#2] =#2*10 ; 
 #2 =#2+1 ; 
 END1 ; 
 - Abbreviations of custom macro word 
When a custom macro word is altered or inserted, the first two characters or more can replace the entire 
word. 
Namely, 
WHILE → WH GOTO → GO XOR → XO AND → AN SIN → SI ASIN → AS


key: chroma:document
string_value:
COS → CO ACOS → AC TAN → TA ATAN → AT SQRT → SQ ABS → AB 
BCD → BC BIN → BI FIX → FI FUP → FU ROUND → RO END → EN 
POPEN → PO BPRNT → BP DPRNT → DP PCLOS → PC EXP → EX THEN → TH 
Example) Keying in 
 WH [AB [#2 ] LE RO [#3 ] ] has the same effect as 
 WHILE [ABS [#2 ] LE ROUND [#3 ] ] 
 The program is also displayed in this way.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1031 - 
10.9 CURSOR MOVEMENT LIMITATIONS ON PROGRAM 
EDITING 
If a program is to be edited while it is stopped or halted, limitations are imposed so that already executed 
blocks and buffered blocks cannot be edited. Modifiable blocks are those at and below the cursor position 
at the time the system switches to the edit mode (EDIT). In the remainder of this manual, the area of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
editable blocks is called the edit-enabled area, while the area of executed blocks and buffered blocks is 
called the edit-disabled area. 
These limitations are applied when the automatic operation status signal <F0000.7> is ON and when a 
single block execution of MDI operation is edited, and are also applied to TEACH IN HNDL or TEACH 
IN JOG mode. 
This function is enabled when bit 3 (FPD) of parameter No. 11308 is 1. 
Explanation 
 - States where cursor movement limitations are imposed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- EDIT mode while automatic operation is stopped or halted 
- MDI mode and when a single block is set 
- TEACH IN HNDL or TEACH IN JOG mode (only when the playback function is enabled) 
 - Cursor movement 
Operations that cause the cursor to move to blocks above the edit mode start position are ignored. 
- ↑
- ←
- PAGE UP 
- CAN (character editing) 
 - Search and replacement 
Operations that cause the cursor to move to the edit-disabled area are disabled.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Top line search: Results in a search of the top line of the edit-enabled block. 
- Specified-line search (character editing): Made through the edit-enabled area. 
If, however, an attempt is made to search through the edit-disabled area, warning "PROGRAM IN 
OPERATION" is issued, and the operation is disabled. 
- Upward search: Made through the edit-enabled area. 
If attempted at the beginning of the edit-enabled block, this operation is ignored.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Upward search (replacement): Made through the edit-enabled area. 
If attempted at the beginning of the edit-enabled block, this operation is ignored. 
- Upward candidate search: Made through the edit-enabled area. 
If attempted at the beginning of the edit-enabled block, this operation is ignored. 
- Character string + ↑ (search): Typing the character string to search for and pressing the ↑ key 
searches for the character string.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This search is made through the edit-enabled area. If attempted at the beginning of the edit-enabled 
block, this operation is ignored. 
- Replace all: This operation is disabled. 
 - Reset 
The program execution status is canceled, and the cursor movement limitations are also canceled. 
 - Program search 
Program search operations are disabled in following screens. 
- Program Editing screen(Word editing/Character editing/Program contents display/Playback) 
- Program Check screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1032 - 
- Program List screen 
When bit 5 (PES) of parameter No. 11302 is 1, only the cursor movement to selected program is 
executed. Setting to the main program and changing to editing screen are not executed. 
 - Time insertion 
When the machining time stamp function is enabled, soft key [INSERT TIME] does not appear in the 
state in which the cursor movement limitations are imposed. 
10.10 PASSWORD FUNCTION


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10.10 PASSWORD FUNCTION 
The password function locks bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202, which protects programs with program 
Nos. O9000 to O9999 and programs and folders having the edit/display disable attribute, according to the 
settings in two parameters, PASSWORD (parameter No. 3210) and KEYWD (parameter No. 3211). In 
the locked state, parameter NE9 cannot be set to 0. In this case, the protection of programs with program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Nos. O9000 to O9999 and programs and folders having the edit/display disable attribute cannot be 
released unless a correct keyword is set. 
A locked state means that the value set in the parameter PASSWD differs from the value set in the 
parameter KEYWD. The values set in these parameters are not displayed. The locked state is released 
when the value already set in the parameter PASSWD is also set in parameter KEYWD. When 0 is 
displayed in parameter PASSWD, parameter PASSWD is not set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure for locking and unlocking 
Locking 
1 Set the MDI mode. 
2 Enable parameter writing (Section, “Displaying and Entering Setting Data”). At this time, alarm 
PS0100 is issued on the CNC. 
3 Set parameter No. 3210 (PASSWD). At this time, the locked state is set. 
4 Disable parameter writing. 
5 Press the key to release the alarm state. 
Unlocking 
1 Set the MDI mode. 
2 Enable parameter writing (Section, “Displaying and Entering Setting Data”). At this time, alarm


key: chroma:document
string_value:
SW0100 is issued on the CNC. 
3 In parameter No. 3211 (KEYWD), set the same value as set in parameter No. 3210 (PASSWD) for 
locking. At this time, the locked state is released. 
4 Set bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No.3202 to 0. 
5 Disable parameter writing. 
6 Press the key to release the alarm state. 
7 Subprograms from program Nos. 9000 to 9999 can now be edited. 
Explanation 
 - Setting parameter PASSWD


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Setting parameter PASSWD 
The locked state is set when a value is set in the parameter PASSWD. However, note that parameter 
PASSWD can be set only when the locked state is not set (when PASSWD = 0, or PASSWD = KEYWD). 
If an attempt is made to set parameter PASSWD in other cases, a warning is given to indicate that writing 
is disabled. When the locked state is set (when PASSWD ≠ 0 and PASSWD ≠ KEYWD), parameter NE9


key: chroma:document
string_value:
is automatically set to 1. If an attempt is made to set NE9 to 0, a warning is given to indicate that writing 
is disabled.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1033 - 
 - Changing parameter PASSWD 
Parameter PASSWD can be changed when the locked state is released (when PASSWD = 0, or PASSWD 
= KEYWD). After step 3 in the procedure for unlocking, a new value can be set in the parameter 
PASSWD. From that time on, this new value must be set in parameter KEYWD to release the locked 
state. 
 - Setting 0 in parameter PASSWD


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When 0 is set in the parameter PASSWD, the number 0 is displayed, and the password function is 
disabled. In other words, the password function can be disabled by either not setting parameter PASSWD 
at all, or by setting 0 in parameter PASSWD after step 3 of the procedure for unlocking. To ensure that 
the locked state is not entered, care must be taken not to set a value other than 0 in parameter PASSWD. 
 - Re-locking


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Re-locking 
After the locked state has been released, it can be set again by setting a different value in parameter 
PASSWD, or by turning the power to the NC off then on again to reset parameter KEYWD. 
 CAUTION 
1 Once the locked state is set, parameter NE9 cannot be set to 0 and parameter 
PASSWD cannot be changed until the locked state is released or the memory 
all-clear operation is performed. Special care must be taken in setting parameter 
PASSWD.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PASSWD. 
2 The edit/display disable attribute cannot be set unless parameter PASSWD is 
set. 
3 In the locked state, programs with the edit/display disable attribute are treated as 
follows: 
- The presence of the programs is hidden. This means that these programs are 
not displayed on screens such as the program folder screen. These programs 
cannot be edited either. 
- These programs cannot be selected as a main program. They can be called 
as subprograms.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
as subprograms. 
4 In the unlocked state, programs with the edit/display disable attribute are treated 
in the same manner as ordinary programs. 
5 The programs in a folder having the edit/display disable attribute are also treated 
as described in Caution 3 and 4 above. 
6 In the locked state, the folders in a folder having the edit/display disable attribute 
are treated as follows: 
- The presence of the folders is hidden. This means that these folders are not


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed on screens such as the program folder screen. 
7 In the unlocked state, the folders in a folder having the edit/display disable 
attribute are treated in the same manner as ordinary folders.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1034 - 
10.11 EDITING PROGRAM CHARACTERS 
This section describes how to edit programs registered in the CNC. 
Editing operations include character insertion, modification, deletion, and replacement. 
While program word editing is performed by recognizing program words, program character editing is 
performed on a character-by-character basis. 
Fig. 10.11 Character editing 
Explanation 
 - Edit unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation 
 - Edit unit 
Character editing is performed on a character-by-character basis. Select between character editing and 
word editing according to what to edit. 
 - Line 
A range delimited by an EOB is specified as a line. 
In character editing, edited data is saved on a line-by-line basis. 
When one program line contains many characters, it extends over multiple lines on the screen, but these 
lines are counted as one program line. 
 - Line splitting


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Line splitting 
When the cursor is on a line during line editing, pressing edit key causes the line to be split into 
two, one before the cursor and the other after the cursor. 
Pressing edit key immediately after the line is split causes the lines to return to a single one. 
Alternatively, moving the cursor to the EOB of the first line resulting from the split and pressing edit key 
 causes the lines to return to a single one. 
 - Line merging


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Line merging 
If the EOB of a line is deleted, the line is combined with the next line to form a single line. 
 - Maximum number of characters in one line 
One line can consist of up to 140 characters.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1035 - 
 - Line number 
The number of lines are counted starting with the starting line of a program, which is counted as the first 
line. Even when a line wraps around to the next and subsequent lines, these lines are counted as a single 
line. 
 - Clipboard 
The clipboard is an area to store characters when a cut or copy operation is performed. The area has a 
capacity for holding approximately 4000 characters.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The characters that are cut or copied by one cut or copy operation are stored. The most recently stored 
character string can be used by the paste function. 
The information stored by the paste operation is kept unchanged until another cut or copy operation is 
performed. 
The characters stored in the clipboard are maintained until the power to the CNC is turned off unless the 
clipboard is updated again. 
 - Undo function


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Undo function 
The function for undoing operations performed in program editing undoes operations sequentially, 
starting with the one performed last. It can undo only those operations that update character strings. 
A single undo operation undoes a single input or deletion operation. 
If data updated with replace operations is to be undone, a single undo operation undoes the replacement 
of a single item. 
Operations of the cursor keys and the page keys cannot be undone


key: chroma:document
string_value:
with this function because they do not update character strings. 
 - Example of the undo function
1 Suppose that the following character string is present before modifications: 
 N110AX[#AXIS3]=100.0; 
2 Edit key is pressed five times. 
 X[#AXIS3]=100.0; 
3 Soft key [UNDO] is pressed five times. Then, the original character string is restored as follows: 
 AX[#AXIS3]=100.0; 
 0AX[#AXIS3]=100.0; 
 10AX[#AXIS3]=100.0; 
 110AX[#AXIS3]=100.0; 
 N110AX[#AXIS3]=100.0;
 - Input modes for editing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Input modes for editing 
Input modes for program editing include insert mode and overwrite mode. 
To switch between the input modes, press soft key [INPUT MODE]. 
Initially, insert mode is set. 
• Insert mode 
 In insert mode, an entered character is inserted between the current cursor position and the preceding 
character position. 
 1234567890 
 When the cursor is placed at 6, and X is entered, the following results: 
 12345X67890 
• Overwrite mode


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Overwrite mode 
 In overwrite mode, the character at the cursor position is replaced by an entered character. 
 1234567890 
 When the cursor is placed at 6, and X is entered, the following results: 
 12345X7890


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1036 - 
 - Restrictions on editing 
O numbers and file names cannot be edited. 
EOR (%) cannot be deleted. 
 - Line editing and automatic saving 
When a line is edited, the line is displayed in the update color, blue (which can be changed with color 
settings), to indicate that the line has been edited. When the line is displayed in the update color, the edit 
has not yet been saved.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
has not yet been saved. 
When the cursor is moved to a line preceding or succeeding the edited line, the edit is automatically saved, 
and the line display changes from the update color to the normal color. 
Alternatively, pressing soft key [SAVE] enables the edit to be saved. 
 - Function for automatically saving an edited line vs. function for undoing 
editing operations (UNDO function) 
When an edit operation is undone, the line is displayed in the update color, and the edit is not saved any


key: chroma:document
string_value:
longer. If the cursor moves to another line when the operation is undone, the edit is automatically saved. 
10.11.1 Available Keys 
The available keys are as follows: 
 - Cursor keys 
Cursor keys , , , and move the cursor. 
 - Editing key 
Deletes the character at the cursor position. 
 - Editing key 
Deletes the character immediately before the cursor position. 
When the cursor is at the beginning of a line, the character at the end of the previous line is deleted. 
 - Editing key


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Editing key 
Causes a line change. 
 - Page change keys 
Pages are changed using page key or 
Page key moves to the next page. 
When page key is pressed on the last page, the cursor moves to the last character position of the 
last line (the % position).
Page key moves to the previous page. 
When page key is pressed on the first page, the cursor moves to the first character position of the 
first line. 
 - Character keys 
Characters are entered using these keys.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1037 - 
10.11.2 Input Mode 
Input modes include insert mode and overwrite mode. 
Changing input mode 
To switch between the input modes, use soft key [INPUT MODE]. 
Pressing soft key [INPUT MODE] causes insert mode and overwrite mode to be selected alternately. 
The current mode is indicated in the lower right part of the editing screen. 
10.11.3 Line Number Display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10.11.3 Line Number Display 
This function is used to display a program with line numbers. Pressing soft key [LINE NUMBER] 
displays a program with line numbers. Pressing soft key [LINE NUMBER] again causes the line numbers 
to disappear. 
10.11.4 Search 
A program is searched for a character string. 
Search 
Procedure 
1 Press soft key [SEARCH]. 
2 A search character string input area is displayed. Enter the character string to search for. To cancel 
the search, press soft key [CANCEL].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Upward search operation 
 Pressing soft key [UP] causes the program to be searched in the upward direction (toward the top), 
starting at the current cursor position. 
 When a search character string is found, the cursor moves to the character string. 
 Pressing soft key [UP] again causes the program to be searched for the next candidate. 
4 Downward search operation 
 Pressing soft key [DOWN] causes the program to be searched in the downward direction (toward the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
bottom), starting at the current cursor position. 
 When a search character string is found, the cursor moves to the character string. 
 Pressing soft key [DOWN] again causes the program to be searched for the next candidate. 
10.11.5 Replacement 
A character string in a program is replaced with a specified character string. 
Replacement 
Procedure 
1 Press soft key [REPLCE]. 
2 Search and replacement character string input areas are displayed. Enter a search character string


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(character string to be replaced) and a replacement character string (character string to replace the 
former character string). 
 To move between the search character string input area and the replacement character string input 
area, use the cursor keys and . 
 If a search character string is input, but no replacement character string is input, the former character 
string will be deleted. 
 To cancel the replacement, press soft key [CANCEL].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1038 - 
3 Replacement operations 
 Replacement operations include an operation for searching for a search character string and an 
operation for actually replacing it. 
 To perform an operation for searching for a search string, use soft key [↑ SEARCH] or [↓
SEARCH]. 
 To perform an operation for actually replacing it, use [REPLCE] or [REPLCE ALL]. 
- Soft key [↑ SEARCH]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Soft key [↑ SEARCH] 
 Searches the program in the upward direction (toward the top), starting at the current cursor 
position. 
 When a search character string is found, the cursor moves to the character string. 
 Pressing soft key [↑ SEARCH] again causes the program to be searched for the next candidate. 
- Soft key [↓ SEARCH] 
 Searches the program in the downward direction (toward the bottom), starting at the current 
cursor position.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
cursor position. 
 When a search character string is found, the cursor moves to the character string. 
 Pressing soft key [↓ SEARCH] again causes the program to be searched for the next candidate. 
- Soft key [REPLCE] 
 Replaces the character string found with a search operation with a replacement character string. 
- Soft key [REPLCE ALL] 
 Replace all instances of the search character string in the program text with the replacement 
character string.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
character string. 
 Pressing this soft key causes message "ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO EXECUTE?" to 
appear and also soft key [YES] and soft key [NO] to appear. Pressing soft key [YES] causes all 
replacements to be executed. 
 Pressing soft key [NO] cancels the replacement operation, without executing the replacements. 
10.11.6 Reversing Edit Operations (Undo Function) 
Edit operations performed on a program can be undone sequentially starting with the one performed last.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Reversing edit operations (undo function) 
Procedure 
1 Pressing soft key [UNDO] once undoes a single operation. 
 When there are no longer any operation to be undone, pressing this soft key has no effect. 
10.11.7 Copy 
A selected character string can be copied to the clipboard. 
Copying 
Procedure 
1 Move the cursor to the beginning of the character string to select. 
2 Press soft key [SELECT]. 
3 Using the cursor keys and the page keys , move the cursor to the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
end of the character string to select. 
 At this time, the background of the selected character string is displayed in the selection color 
(cursor color). 
4 Press soft key [COPY] to copy the selected character string to the clipboard. 
 To cancel the copying, press soft key [CANCEL].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1039 - 
10.11.8 Cut 
A selected character string can be deleted. 
When deleted, the character string is copied to the clipboard. 
Cut 
Procedure 
1 Move the cursor to the beginning of the character string to select. 
2 Press soft key [SELECT]. 
3 Using the cursor keys and the page keys , move the cursor to the 
end of the character string to select. 
 At this time, the background of the selected character string is displayed in the selection color


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(cursor color). 
4 Press soft key [CUT] to delete the selected character string. 
 To cancel the deletion, press soft key [CANCEL]. 
10.11.9 Paste 
The character string stored in the clipboard can be inserted at the current cursor position. 
After pasted, the character string remains stored in the clipboard, so that the character string can be pasted 
as many times as necessary. 
Paste 
Procedure 
1 Move the cursor to the position at which you want to paste a character string.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the soft key [PASTE]. 
10.11.10 Saving 
Moving the cursor to a line preceding or succeeding the edited line causes the edit to be automatically 
saved, but it is possible to save the edit by pressing soft key [SAVE], if necessary. For a program 
consisting of only a single line, in particular, it is necessary to press soft key [SAVE] to save the edit. 
Saving 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [SAVE]. 
10.11.11 Creation 
A new program can be created. 
Creation 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Creation 
Procedure 
1 Press soft key [NEW PROGRM]. 
2 A program name input area appears. 
3 Enter the name of a program to be created. 
4 Press the soft key [EXECUTE]. This creates a new program and displays the editing screen. 
 To cancel the creation of a new program, press soft key [CANCEL].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1040 - 
10.11.12 Line Search 
The cursor can be moved to a specified line. 
The cursor can be moved to a line with a specified line number, to the first line of the program, and to the 
last line of the program. 
Line search 
Procedure 
Movement to a line with a specified line number 
1 Press soft key [LINE SEARCH]. 
2 A line number input area appears. 
3 Enter a line number. The first line is regarded as having a line number of 1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press soft key [LINE NUMBER], and the cursor moves to the specified line. 
Movement to the first line 
1 Press soft key [LINE SEARCH]. 
2 Press soft key [TOP], and the cursor moves to the first line of the program. 
Movement to the last line 
1 Press soft key [LINE SEARCH]. 
2 Press soft key [BOTTOM], and the cursor moves to the last line of the program. 
10.12 KEYS AND PROGRAM ENCRYPTION 
Overview


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Overview 
Program contents can be protected by setting parameters for encryption and for the program security 
range. 
Explanation 
1 Security with a password and a security range 
When the password and security range parameters are specified, the display, editing, and 
input/output operations are disabled for the programs within the security range. 
This prevents the custom macro programs created by the machine tool builder from being


key: chroma:document
string_value:
accidentally changed or deleted by the end user. This also provides security because the contents of 
the programs are not displayed. 
2 Input/output of encrypted programs 
The programs in the security range can be encrypted before being output. Once encrypted, the 
programs cannot be decrypted. In addition, encrypted programs can be input directly. 
 - Locking/unlocking 
When the programs in the security range are secured, the program memory is said to be locked.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If they are not secured, the program memory is said to be unlocked. 
 - Parameter 
- Parameter PASSWORD (No.3220) 
Set the password required to lock the program memory. A password other than 0 can be set. The 
password is not displayed. A password can be set when no password is set (PASSWORD = 0) or the 
program memory is unlocked. 
- Parameter KEY (No.3221) 
When KEY is set equal to PASSWORD, the program memory is unlocked. The value set for the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameter is never displayed. Each time the CNC is started, 0 is set for the parameter. This means 
that whenever the CNC is started, a lock is provided if a password is set (PASSWORD ≠ 0).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1041 - 
- Minimum value (in parameter No.3222) and maximum value (in parameter No.3223) of the program 
security range 
Set the desired security range. The value set for MINIMUM must not be greater than that set for 
MAXIMUM. The programs in the range of MINIMUM to MAXIMUM are secured. If MINIMUM 
is set to 0, it is regarded as being 9000. If MAXIMUM is set to 0, it is regarded as being 9999.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A range can be set when no password is set or the program memory is unlocked. 
NOTE 
1 For security, the values set for PASSWORD and KEY are not displayed. For the 
same reason, PASSWORD, MINIMUM, and MAXIMUM can be specified only 
when no password is set or the program memory is unlocked. Set a password, 
taking great care to avoid a situation where the program memory cannot be 
unlocked because a password is set incorrectly.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 The [+INPUT] key used to specify PASSWORD and KEY behave in the same 
way as the [INPUT] soft key. 
Example: When 99 is set for KEY, pressing 1 and [+INPUT] changes the 
value to 1. 
3 These four parameters cannot be output externally. Also, even when these 
parameters are input by the parameter input operation, they are ignored. 
 - Inputting/outputting and collating programs 
When a program is encrypted, a password is output. The password is used to load the program.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The following output operations are enabled for programs outside the security range if the locked state is 
present or for programs within the security range if the unlocked state is present: 
 Outputting all programs 
Locked/unlocked Results 
Locked All the programs outside the security range are output in the normal way. 
Unlocked All the programs within the security range are encrypted and output. 
Password not set All the programs in the program memory are output in the normal way.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Outputting a single program 
Locked/unlocked Results 
Locked If a program is outside the security range, it is output in the normal way. 
If it is within the security range, a warning "PROTECTED" is issued. 
Unlocked If a program is outside the security range, it is output in the normal way. 
If it is within the security range, it is encrypted and output. 
Password not set The program is output in a normal way. 
 Outputting specified multiple programs 
Locked/unlocked Results


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Locked/unlocked Results 
Locked When all of the specified programs fall outside the protected range, they are 
output as usual. 
When all of the specified programs are within the security range, warning 
message "PROTECTED" is issued. 
When some of the specified program numbers are outside the security range, and 
the others are within the security range, only the programs outside the security 
range are output normally. 
When the programs to be output are not within the specified range, warning


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1042 - 
Locked/unlocked Results 
Unlocked When all of the specified programs fall outside the protected range, they are 
output as usual. 
When all the specified programs fall within the protected range, they are output as 
encoded programs. 
When some of the specified program numbers are outside the security range, and 
the others are within the security range, only the programs within the security 
range are encoded and output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
range are encoded and output. 
When the programs to be output are not within the specified range, warning 
message "THE WRONG DATA IS USED" is issued. 
Password not set The program is output in a normal way. 
 Inputting an un-encrypted program 
Locked/unlocked Results 
Locked When the program to be input is outside the security range, it is input normally. 
When the program to be input is within the security range, warning message 
"PROTECTED" is issued. 
Unlocked, or password 
not set


key: chroma:document
string_value:
not set 
The program is input. 
 Inputting an encrypted program 
Password set in the system 
and password of the program Results 
Password set in the system Warning “WRITE PROTECT” is issued. 
Password for the program When the program is within the security range, it is input normally. 
When the program is outside the security range, warning message "WRITE 
PROTECTED" is issued. 
Password not set in the system The program is input. 
The PSW in the file is set for parameter No. 3220.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This applies if the program is in the security range. 
If the program is outside the security range, warning message "PROTECTED" is 
issued. 
 Collating a program with an encrypted program 
In the unlocked state, the following takes place: 
Password set in the system 
and password of the program 
Results 
Password set in the system Alarm SR0075 “PROTECT” is issued. 
Password set in the system = 
Password of the program, or 
password not set in the system 
The program is collated.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The program is collated. 
In the locked state, program collation cannot be performed. 
NOTE 
 To encrypt programs, set parameter ISO (bit 1 of No.0000) to 1 (to specify that 
the output code is ISO). 
 - Program display 
1 On the program folder screen, all program numbers are displayed together with comments. 
2 In the locked state, the programs within the security range are not displayed on the program screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the unlocked state, the programs within the security range are displayed in the same way as 
normal programs.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1043 - 
NOTE 
 Immediately after switched from the unlocked state to the locked state or from the 
locked state to the unlocked state, programs are displayed in the previous state. 
They are displayed in the new state when a program search or other operation is 
performed. 
 - Editing and deleting programs 
When the program memory is locked, the programs within the security range cannot be edited or deleted.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the program memory is locked, an attempt to delete all programs results in only those programs 
outside the security range being deleted. 
In the locked state, the programs in the security range cannot be selected as a main program. If an attempt 
is made to select such a program on the program folder screen as a main program, warning message 
"SETTING A MAIN PROGRAM FAILED" is issued. 
 - Searching for programs


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Searching for programs 
In the locked state, a program search is performed within the protected range as described below. 
1 When no program number is specified, programs within the protected range are skipped. 
2 When an attempt is made to search for a program within the security range by specifying a program 
number, the search operation is ignored, resulting in warning message "Program is protected". 
10.13 SIMULTANEOUS EDITING OF MULTIPATH PROGRAMS


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs enables simultaneous editing of programs for multiple paths 
on a single screen. 
This function is enabled when bit 0 (DHD) of parameter No. 3106 is 1. 
Explanation 
 - Procedure 
1 Set the paths subject to simultaneous editing, with multi-path simultaneous display parameters Nos. 
13131 and 13132. 
 (For details of the parameters, refer to the Parameter Manual (B-64700EN).) 
2 Place the paths subject to simultaneous editing in EDIT mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press function key . 
4 Press soft key [PROGRAM] to display the program editing screen. 
 - Screen display 
Fig. 10.13 (a) and Fig. 10.13 (b) show examples of performing simultaneous editing of multi-path 
programs. 
Above each program is a status line on which three items of information are displayed: the program name, 
"FG-EDIT", which indicates that the program is being edited in the foreground, and the path name.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1044 - 
Fig. 10.13 (a) Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs screen (10.4-inch display unit) 
Fig. 10.13 (b) Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs screen (15-inch display unit) 
 - Modes 
When the paths to be displayed simultaneously are in either EDIT or MEM mode, the multi-path 
programs are displayed simultaneously on the program screen. Selecting the path for which EDIT mode is 
selected enables program editing to be performed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 10.13 (c) shows an example in which both EDIT and MEM modes are selected. 
For path 1, MEM mode (execution status screen) is selected, and for path 2, EDIT mode (editing screen) 
is selected. 
Soft keys are switched according to the mode for the currently selected path. 
Target of 
editing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1045 - 
Fig. 10.13 (c) Screen on which both MEM and EDIT modes are selected 
 - Switching the path subject to editing 
The path selected with the path selection signal is subject to editing.
 - Maximum number of paths that can be subject to editing simultaneously 
The maximum number of paths that can be subject to editing simultaneously on each display unit is as 
given in the Table 10.13. 
Table 10.13


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Table 10.13 
Display unit size Maximum number of paths that can be subject to 
editing simultaneously 
10.4-inch 3 
15 or 19-inch 4 
 - Conditions under which simultaneous editing is not usable 
Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs is disabled in the following cases: 
- The program screen is selected as a small screen. 
- The paths to be displayed simultaneously include a path for which a mode other than EDIT and 
MEM modes is selected. 
- The virtual MDI key function is enabled.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If, in the state of simultaneous editing of multi-path programs, background editing is started, background 
editing is performed on all screens. Simultaneous editing of multi-path programs and background editing 
cannot be used at the same time.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1046 - 
10.14 MULTI-PATH EDITING FUNCTION 
10.14.1 Overview 
When the program of the path to be edited is scrolled in the simultaneous editing of multi-path programs 
screen, other path programs that are displayed on the same screen can be scrolled simultaneously. 
Fig. 10.14.1 Synchronous scroll function 
This function provides the simultaneous scroll mode in which all programs being edited simultaneously


key: chroma:document
string_value:
are scrolled and the single scroll mode in which only the program to be edited is scrolled. It is possible to 
switch between these modes easily through soft key operation. 
In the simultaneous scroll mode, when a waiting M-code comes due to a scroll, waiting is performed by 
stopping the scroll of the path until the arrival of the same waiting M-code of other paths. It is, therefore, 
possible to edit the program while confirming the waiting of each path.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Moreover, the waiting search function enables the cursor positions of all paths being edited 
simultaneously to be moved to specified waiting M-code simultaneously. 
10.14.2 Details 
Switching between simultaneous and single scroll modes 
The following conditions are necessary for switching between simultaneous scroll mode and single scroll 
mode on the program editing screen. 
- Bit 0 (DHD) of parameter No. 3106 for enabling the simultaneous multi-path program editing 
function is 1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
function is 1. 
- There are two or more paths in the simultaneous editing mode. 
- All paths being edited simultaneously are in EDIT mode. 
- All program editing screens for simultaneous editing are in word editor mode. 
NOTE 
1 The single scroll mode is selected when the power is turn on. 
2 If the above conditions are not satisfied, the scroll mode is automatically 
switched to single scroll mode. 
Object to be edited Scrolled simultaneously


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1047 - 
Procedure for switching to the simultaneous scroll mode 
The procedure for switching to the simultaneous scroll mode is as described below. 
1 Press function key . 
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM] to display the program editing screen. 
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press continuous menu key [+] several times until oft key [SYNC SCROLL] appears. 
5 Press soft key [SYNC SCROLL].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 The screen changes to the simultaneous scroll mode. At this time, the display of the soft key [SYNC 
SCROLL] changes to [SINGLE SCROLL]. 
Fig. 10.14.2 (a) Multi-path editing screen 
Procedure for switching to the single scroll mode 
The procedure for switching to the single scroll mode is as described below. 
1 Press function key . 
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM] to display the program editing screen. 
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press continuous menu key [+] several times until oft key [SINGLE SCROLL] appears. 
5 Press soft key [SINGLE SCROLL]. 
6. The screen changes to the single scroll mode. At this time, the display of the soft key [SINGLE 
SCROLL] changes to [SYNC SCROLL]. 
Automatic simultaneous scroll mode change 
When the parameter DAS (No.11349#5) is set to 1, the scroll mode is simultaneous scroll mode after


key: chroma:document
string_value:
power in turn on. The scroll mode becomes a single scroll mode in the following situations. It 
automatically returns to the simultaneous scroll mode when the following situations are canceled. 
- There are no two paths or more in the simultaneous editing mode. 
- One or more paths are not EDIT modes. 
- One or more programs of simultaneous editing are in character editing mode. 
- During background editing mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1048 - 
Cursor movement operations 
In the simultaneous scroll mode, pressing the cursor movement keys causes the cursors to 
move up and down in all programs being edited simultaneously. 
If the cursor movement keys are pressed to move within the same block, the cursors for the 
paths other than the one to be edited do not move. 
If the cursor movement keys are pressed to move the cursor to the previous and next blocks,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the cursors for the paths not to be edited also move. 
Those programs for paths that are not displayed on the screen do not scroll simultaneously. 
Page change operation 
In the simultaneous scroll mode, pressing the page change keys causes the page to change 
in all programs being edited simultaneously. 
Scroll waiting with a waiting M-code 
In the simultaneous scroll mode, if the cursor moves to a block that contains a waiting M-code, the 
system enters the scroll waiting state.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the scroll waiting state, the cursor cannot be moved in the direction in which the cursor has moved to 
the block that contains a waiting M-code until the cursors of all programs subject to waiting move to the 
same waiting M-code. 
In the scroll waiting state, the cursor color changes to blue as shown in Fig. 10.14.2 (b). 
NOTE 
 A waiting M code is not ignored due to the waiting ignore signal. 
Example: 
 The cursor cannot be moved in the down direction if pressing the cursor key causes the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
system to enter the scroll waiting state. The cursor can move in the up direction.
Fig. 10.14.2 (b) Waiting caused by pressing the cursor key 
×


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1049 - 
Similarly, if the cursor is moved to a block that contains a waiting M-code by pressing a page change key, 
the system enters the scroll waiting state in the block that contains a waiting M-code. 
Fig. 10.14.2 (c) Scroll waiting caused by pressing a page change key 
Completion of scroll waiting 
When the cursors move to the same waiting M-code in all programs subject to waiting, scroll waiting is 
completed, so that scrolling can be continued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 10.14.2 (d) All programs displayed simultaneously are in the scroll waiting state 
Release of scroll waiting 
If, in the scroll waiting state, the cursor for the program for another path is moved to the beginning or end 
of the program, a confirmation message and soft keys are displayed as shown in Fig. 10.14.2 (e). 
To release the scroll waiting state, press the soft key [EXEC]. 
To cancel the release of the scroll waiting state, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1050 - 
Fig. 10.14.2 (e) Display of the confirmation message for the release of the scroll waiting state 
Waiting M-code search 
By doing a waiting M-code search, it is possible to simultaneously move the cursors to the blocks that 
contain specified waiting-M code in all programs being edited simultaneously. 
To do a waiting M-code search, press the soft key [SYNC SEARCH] in the simultaneous scroll mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The soft keys shown in Fig. 10.14.2 (f) are displayed. 
Fig. 10.14.2 (f) Soft keys for doing a waiting M-code search 
[PREVI SYNC] Searches for a waiting M-code in the up direction, starting at the cursor position 
in the program to be edited. 
 The cursors of the paths specified for waiting move to the same waiting M-code. 
[NEXT SYNC] Searches for a waiting M-code in the down direction, starting at the cursor 
position in the program to be edited.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The cursors of the paths specified for waiting move to the same waiting M-code. 
[MCODE NUMBER] Searches for a specified waiting M-code. Only an M-code or an M-code number 
can be specified. The cursors move to the specified waiting M-code in all 
programs being edited simultaneously. 
[TOP] In all programs being edited simultaneously, moves the cursors to the beginning 
of the programs. 
[BOTTOM] In all programs being edited simultaneously, moves the cursors to the end of the 
programs.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
programs. 
If, as a result of a waiting M-code search, no waiting M-code is found, the cursor moves to the end of the 
program. In this case, the warning, "SYNC POINT IS NOT FOUND.", is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 10. EDITING PROGRAMS
- 1051 - 
Highlight of Waiting M-code 
When bit 1 (SMH) of parameter No.24308 is 1, waiting M code is highlighted. 
Fig. 10.14.2 (g) Highlight of Waiting M-code 
Restrictions 
The simultaneous scroll function cannot be used in character editing or in background editing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1052 -
11 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
Program management functions are classified into the following two types:
- Functions for folders
- Functions for programs
Functions for folders include creation, deletion, change of names and attributes, and so on.
Functions for programs include main program selection, deletion, change of names and attributes, and so 
on.
About program management, refer to "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in PROGRAMMING 
additionally.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
additionally.
Management of
devices and
folders
Program 
management
Creation and registration
Editing
Management
Output Execution
Renaming a file ...................................See III-11.8.
Deleting a file ......................................See III-11.9
Changing file attributes .......................See III-11.10
Selecting a main program ...................See III-11.11
Program and folder copy/move...........See III-11.13


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Program verification ............................See III-11.15
High-speed program management .....See III-11.16
Selecting a device .............................. See III-11.1.
Creating a folder................................. See |||-11.2.
Renaming a folder.............................. See |||-11.3.
Changing current folder...................... See |||-11.4.
Changing folder attributes .................. See |||-11.5.
Deleting a folder ................................. See |||-11.6.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Selecting a default folder.................... See |||-11.7.
Folder management ........................... See III-11.14


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1053 -
11.1 SELECTING A DEVICE
When the fast data server function is provided, a program storage device can be selected. This section 
explains the selection procedure.
Procedure for selecting a device
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Press the soft key [DEVICECHANGE].
5 Press the soft key for the desired device.
Devices that can be selected are listed below (Table 11.1):
Table 11.1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Table 11.1
Soft key Device name
CNC MEM CNC part program storage memory
MEM CARD Program storage file (named "FANUCPRG.BIN")
EMB ETHER Embedded Ethernet
DTSVR Data Server
DTSVR HOST Data Server Host
MEMORY CARD Memory card
FLOPPY Floppy cassette (Handy File)
USB MEM USB memory
11.1.1 Selecting a Memory Card Program as a Device
Overview
By selecting a memory card including a program storage file (named "FANUCPRG.BIN") as a device,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
memory operation can be performed with the program in the program storage file selected as the main 
program.
In addition, the content of a program storage file can be displayed on the program list screen or a program 
in a program storage file can be edited on the program edit screen.
A program storage file can be created using a memory card program tool (A08B-9010-J700#ZZ11) on a 
commercially available personal computer. To be used, the program storage file must be written to a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
memory card formatted in FAT16 format.
(A program held in a program storage file is hereinafter referred to as a memory card program. Moreover, 
a memory card storing a program storage file is referred to as a program storage memory card.)
NOTE
Any program in a USB memory cannot be selected or edited.
Procedure for selecting a device
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Press the soft key [DEVICECHANGE].
5 Press the soft key [MEMCARD].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1054 -
NOTE
1 A FAT16-formatted memory card containing the program storage file 
FANUCPRG.BIN is recognized as a program storage memory card.
2 For a program storage memory card containing more than 63 folders and 
programs, the function for extending the number of memory card program 
registrations is required. The function for extending the number of memory card 
program registrations is applicable to a program storage memory card containing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
a maximum of 1000 folders and programs.
Procedure for removing a device
When a program storage memory card is replaced or a memory card is used for normal usage such as data 
input/output, clear the recognition of the program storage memory card with removal operation.
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Press the soft key [DEVICECHANGE].
5 Press the soft key [DETACH].
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
1 This soft key appears when the CNC recognizes a program storage memory 
card during device change operation.
2 This operation is enabled only in EDIT mode or MEM mode.
When a memory card program is selected in the main programs of multiple 
paths in a multi-path control system, set the modes of all paths to EDIT mode or 
MEM mode.
3 When the default folder is a folder in a program storage file, it is changed to 
"//CNC_MEM/" by a removal operation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 When the main program is a memory card program, the main program enters 
the unselected state by a removal operation.
Explanation
- About operation
A memory card program can be selected as a main program to perform memory operation.
Memory operation has the following features:
- Subprogram call nesting is allowed.
- Macro program call nesting is allowed.
- In a custom macro, a control command using a GOTO statement/WHILE statement can be specified.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- With the T series, a multiple repetitive canned cycle for turning can be specified.
NOTE
To use the function for using custom macros, enable custom macros (bit 5 
(NMC) of parameter No.8135 is set to 0).
- Selection as a main program
As a main program to be automatically executed in the MEM mode, a memory card program can be 
selected.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1055 -
- Sub program (call using M98/G72.1/G72.2)
- Macro program (call using G65/G66/G66.1/M96)
The following subprogram/macro program held in the same folder as containing the main program is 
called:
- Sub program call (M98)
- Macro call (Simple macro call G65 / Modal call G66, G66.1)
- Macro interrupt (M96)
- Figure copying (G72.1, G72.2)
If the program cannot be found in the same folder as the main program, the following folder is searched:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Common program folder on the CNC_MEM device (CNC program storage memory)
- Sub program (call using M code/S code/T code/particular address/the second 
auxiliary function)
- Macro program (call using G code/M code)
The following subprogram/macro program calls a program from the CNC_MEM device (CNC program
storage memory):
- Subprogram call using M code/S code/T code/particular addresses/the second auxiliary function
- Macro call using G code/M code


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The folders set as search targets are searched in the following order, and the first found program is called:
1 Common program folder among the initial folders
2 MTB-dedicated folder 2 among the initial folders
3 MTB-dedicated folder 1 among the initial folders
4 System folder among the initial folders
Search target folders are set in parameter No. 3457.
NOTE
For a memory card program, subprogram call using M code/S code/T


key: chroma:document
string_value:
code/particular addresses/the second auxiliary function or macro call using G 
code/M code can be specified. However, a program on the CNC_MEM device
(CNC program storage memory) is called.
- External program number search / External workpiece number search
A program on a program storage memory card can be searched for with the external program number 
search function or external workpiece number search function.
Limitation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Limitation
For a memory card program, M198 cannot be specified. Moreover, no memory card program can be 
called from a program on the CNC_MEM device (CNC program storage memory) by specifying M198.
When a setting is made to enable an external device subprogram call from a memory card (M198) or 
DNC operation from a memory card (bit 7 (MNC) of parameter No. 0138 = 1), the content of program 
storage file cannot be displayed during automatic operation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When a program storage memory card is selected, the memory card cannot be used for the ordinary 
purposes listed below. To use a memory card in such a case, perform a "removal" operation to cancel the 
recognition of the program storage memory card.
- ALL I/O screen
Display of the contents of a memory card, and input/output data to and from a memory card
- PMC data I/O screen
Display of the contents of a memory card, and input/output to and from a memory card
- Program directory screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1056 -
- External device subprogram call (M198) operation
Subprogram call (M198) with a memory card set as an external device
- DNC operation
DNC operation from a memory card
CAUTION 
1 Do not remove the memory card when a program that specifies a write to the 
memory card is being edited. The data can be destructed.
2 If an editing operation is completed, the results of editing are preserved even 
when the power to the CNC is turned off.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 When removing the memory card, be sure to perform a "removal" operation. If the 
memory card is removed without performing a "removal" operation and an 
attempt is made to access the memory card, the alarm (SR1964) or alarm
(IO1030) is issued.
If the card is removed inadvertently, insert the card again and perform a "removal" 
operation.
When an alarm is issued, perform the following operation:
- When the alarm (SR1964) is issued
Reset the alarm after performing a "removal" operation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- When the alarm (IO1030) is issued
The alarm can be reset only by turning off the power to the CNC.
4 There are cases in which when a memory card is replaced with another, the CNC 
cannot detect the replacement. Thus, it is risky to replace a memory card without 
performing a "removal" operation, and this should never be attempted.
- Operation of creation, edition, and management of a program
When “memory card program as a device” is selected, operation of creation, edition, and management of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
a program is below (Table 11.1.1):
Table 11.1.1
Item Usable
Creation of a program Unusable
Edition prohibition attribute Unusable
Inserting, alteration, and deletion a Word Usable
Deletion of a block Usable
Program search Usable
Sequence number search Usable
Deletion of a program Unusable
Editing a custom macro Usable
Password function Unusable
Editing a program character Usable
Program and folder copy/move function Usable (Note)
Key and program encryption Unusable
Selecting a device Usable


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Selecting a device Usable
Creation of a folder Unusable
Renaming of a folder Unusable
Changing the attribute of a folder Unusable
Deletion of a folder Unusable
Selecting a default folder Usable
Renaming of a file Unusable
Deletion of a file Unusable
Changing the attribute of a file Unusable
Selecting a main program Usable
Input/output of program Unusable


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1057 -
NOTE
In memory card program device, programs are copied from memory card 
program device to CNC built-in memory device or to data server device, or 
copied from CNC built-in memory device or from data server device to memory 
card program device.
11.1.2 Selecting a From Cassette as a Device
The Handy File can be connected to the NC to display a list of programs in a floppy cassette.
Procedure for selecting a device


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Set the relevant parameters so that communication with the Handy File is enabled.
2 Press the function key .
3 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
5 Press the soft key [DEVICECHANGE].
6 Press the soft key [FLOPPY].
Limitation
- Floppy disk directory display during schedule operation
During schedule operation, directories in a floppy disk cannot be displayed in a background edit.
- Operation of creation, edition, and management of a program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When “floppy cassette as a device” is selected, operation of creation, edition, and management of a 
program is below (Table 11.1.2):
Table 11.1.2
Item Usable
Creation of a program Unusable
Edition prohibition attribute Unusable
Inserting, alteration, and deletion a Word Unusable
Deletion of a block Unusable
Program search Usable
Sequence number search Unusable
Deletion of a program Usable
Editing a custom macro Unusable
Password function Unusable
Editing a program character Unusable


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Program and folder copy/move function Unusable
Key and program encryption Unusable
Selecting a device Usable
Creation of a folder Unusable
Renaming of a folder Unusable
Changing the attribute of a folder Unusable
Deletion of a folder Unusable
Selecting a default folder Unusable
Renaming of a file Unusable
Deletion of a file Usable
Changing the attribute of a file Unusable
Selecting a main program Unusable
Input/output of program Usable


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1058 -
11.1.3 Selecting a USB Memory as a Device
When a commercially available USB memory is inserted into the USB memory interface of the CNC, the 
CNC recognizes the USB memory as an external input/output device.
The following operations can be performed for a USB memory:
- Listing the files and folders in the USB memory
- Renaming and creating a file or folder in the USB memory


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Inputting and outputting an NC program between the CNC part program storage memory and USB 
memory
Procedure for selecting a device
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Press the soft key [DEVICECHANGE].
5 Press the soft key [USB MEM].
Limitation
There are the following restrictions on the USB function.
(1) Only one USB memory can be recognized. (No USB hub can be recognized.)
(2) Up to 32 characters can be used for a file or folder name.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If a file or folder name is longer than 32 characters, the 32nd character is replaced with a tilde (~) 
and the subsequent characters are omitted when displayed. All operations including management 
operation and input/output cannot be performed for a file or folder whose name is omitted with a 
tilde (~).
(3) The maximum number of folder levels is 6 (excluding the root folder).
(4) The maximum number of files and folders in a folder is 512.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(5) If a non-ASCII character (alphanumeric character) is used in a file or folder name, it cannot be 
displayed correctly.
For detailed specifications of and restrictions on a USB memory, see the section related to the USB 
function.
NOTE
1 Remove a USB memory only when “REMOVE OK” is displayed as the USB 
memory status, or data may be damaged.
2 When the free space of the USB memory is a little or when a large amount of file


key: chroma:document
string_value:
is in the USB memory, it might take time to operate the USB memory. In the 
default configuration, warning "TIME-OUT" is displayed after 30 seconds 
passed, and the operation of the USB memory stops. When the period of the 
time-out is changed, set parameter No.11376 .
- Operation of creation, edition, and management of a program
When “USB memory as a device” is selected, operation of creation, edition, and management of a 
program is below (Table 11.1.3):
Table 11.1.3
Item Usable


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1059 -
Item Usable
Inserting, alteration, and deletion a Word Unusable
Deletion of a block Unusable
Program search Usable
Sequence number search Unusable
Deletion of a program Usable
Editing a custom macro Unusable
Password function Unusable
Editing a program character Unusable
Program and folder copy/move function Usable (Note)
Key and program encryption Unusable
Selecting a device Usable
Creation of a folder Usable
Renaming of a folder Usable


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Renaming of a folder Usable
Changing the attribute of a folder Unusable
Deletion of a folder Usable
Selecting a default folder Unusable
Renaming of a file Usable
Deletion of a file Usable
Changing the attribute of a file Unusable
Selecting a main program Unusable
Input/output of program Usable
NOTE
In USB device, programs are copied from USB device to CNC built-in memory 
device or from CNC built-in memory device to USB device.
11.2 CREATING A FOLDER


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11.2 CREATING A FOLDER
This section explains the procedure for creating a folder.
Procedure for creating a folder
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press the function key .
3 Move to the folder in which you want to create a folder.
Use the cursor keys and to move among folders. After selecting the folder, press the 
key.
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
5 Type folder name.
6 Press the soft key [CREATE FOLDER].
NOTE
1 Each folder name must be unique within the same folder.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Each time a folder is created, the number of programs that can be registered 
decreases by one.
3 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a folder cannot 
sometimes be created.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1060 -
11.3 RENAMING A FOLDER
This section explains the procedure for renaming a folder.
Procedure for renaming a folder
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press the function key .
3 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
4 Select the folder that you want to rename.
To select a folder, use the cursor keys and .
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
6 Type new folder name.
7 Press the soft key [RENAME].
NOTE
1 You cannot rename the initial folders.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Each folder name must be unique within the same folder.
3 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a folder cannot 
sometimes be renamed.
11.4 CHANGING CURRENT FOLDER
Current folder is selected folder in program contents display and program folder screen.
Procedure for changing current folder in folder screen
Changing to the upper folder
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
3 Move the cursor to “RETURN TO UPPER FOLDER”.
4 Press the MDI key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press the MDI key .
Changing to the under folder
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
3 Move the cursor to the folder to select.
4 Press the MDI key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1061 -
Procedure for changing current folder in folder tree display.
In folder tree display, current folder is changed by moving cursor on the tree.
Changing to the upper folder
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Press the soft key [TREE LIST].
5 Press the cursor key .
Fig.11.4 (a)
Changing to the under folder
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [FOLDER].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Press the soft key [TREE LIST].
5 Press the cursor key .
Fig.11.4 (b)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1062 -
Changing to the next folder
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Press the soft key [TREE LSIT].
5 Press the cursor key or .
Fig.11.4 (c)
11.5 CHANGING FOLDER ATTRIBUTES
This section explains the procedure for changing the attribute of a folder (edit disable or edit/display 
disable).
Procedure for changing folder attributes
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press the function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the function key .
3 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
4 Select the folder of which attribute is to be changed.
To select a folder, use the cursor keys and .
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
6 Press the soft key [DETAILON].
7 Press the soft key [CHANGE ATTR].
- To disable editing, press the soft key [EDIT DISABL].
- To enable editing, press the soft key [EDIT ENABLE].
- To disable editing and display, press the soft key [DISP DISABL].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- To enable editing and display, press the soft key [DISP ENABLE].
NOTE
1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, the attribute of a folder 
cannot sometimes be changed.
2 When the edit disable attribute is set for a folder, editing of folders and files in 
that folder is disabled.
3 When the edit/display disable attribute is set for a folder, editing and display of 
folders and files in that folder is disabled, and these folders and files are not 
displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1063 -
11.6 DELETING A FOLDER
This section explains the procedure for deleting a folder.
Procedure for deleting a folder
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press the function key .
3 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
4 Select the folder that you want to delete.
To select a folder, use the cursor keys and .
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
6 Press the soft key [DELETE].
- To perform the deletion, press the soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- To cancel the deletion, press the soft key [CANCEL].
NOTE
1 You cannot delete the initial folders.
2 A folder cannot be deleted unless the folder is empty.
(An empty folder means that the folder contains neither folders nor files.)
3 If a folder contains a folder or file having the edit/display disable attribute, the 
folder may seem to be empty when displayed, but the folder is not actually 
empty, so it cannot be deleted.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a folder cannot 
sometimes be deleted.
11.7 SELECTING A DEFAULT FOLDER
This section explains the procedure for selecting a foreground or background default folder.
What is a default folder is described in "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in PROGGRAMMING.
Procedure for selecting a default folder
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press the function key .
3 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
4 Move to the folder that you want to select as the default folder.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Use the cursor keys and to move among folders. After selecting the folder, press the 
key.
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
6 - To select the foreground, press the soft key [FORE CHANGE].
- To select the background, press the soft key [BACK CHANGE].
NOTE
1 When the foreground or background default folder is not set, the path folder, 
which is an initial folder, is assumed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1064 -
NOTE
2 The settings for the foreground and background default folders are stored in the 
default folder setting file.
3 When a program file, program folder, or program folder management file is 
cleared, the default folder setting file is also cleared at the same time.
11.8 RENAMING A FILE
This section explains the procedure for renaming a file.
Procedure for renaming a file
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press the function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the function key .
3 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
4 Move to the folder containing the file that you want to rename.
Use the cursor keys and to move among folders. After selecting the folder, press the 
key.
5 Select the file that you want to rename.
To select a file, use the cursor keys and .
6 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
7 Type new file name.
8 Press the soft key [RENAME].
NOTE
1 Each file name must be unique within the same file.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 When the assigned file name cannot be treated as a program number, the 
program in the file is restricted as follows:
- Specification by program number is impossible.
(Such as a subprogram call)
- Information output by program number is impossible.
3 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a file cannot 
sometimes be renamed.
11.9 DELETING A FILE
This section explains the procedure for deleting a file.
Procedure for deleting a file
1 Select EDIT mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press the function key .
3 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
4 Move to the folder containing the file that you want to delete.
Use the cursor keys and to move among folders. After selecting the folder, press the 
key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1065 -
5 Select the file that you want to delete.
To select a file, use the cursor keys and .
6 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
7 Press the soft key [DELETE].
- To perform the deletion, press the soft key [EXEC].
- To cancel the deletion, press the soft key [CANCEL].
NOTE
Depending on the operation status and protection status, a file cannot 
sometimes be deleted.
11.10 CHANGING FILE ATTRIBUTES


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11.10 CHANGING FILE ATTRIBUTES
This section explains the procedure for changing the attribute of a file (edit disable, edit/display disable, 
encoding, or protection of data at eight levels).
Procedure for selecting the attribute of a file
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press the function key .
3 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
4 Move to the folder containing the file of which attribute is to be changed.
Use the cursor keys and to move among folders. After selecting the folder, press the 
key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
key.
5 Select the file of which attribute is to be changed.
To select a file, use the cursor keys and .
6 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
7 Press the soft key [DETAILON].
8 Press the continuous menu key until the desired soft key appears.
9 - To disable editing, press the soft key [EDIT DISABL].
- To enable editing, press the soft key [EDIT ENABLE].
- To disable editing and display, press the soft key [DISP DISABL].
- To enable editing/display, press the soft key [DISP ENABLE].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- To set encoding, press the soft key [ENCODESET].
- To cancel encoding, press the soft key [ENCODE RESET].
- To change the change protection level, type a change protection level, then press the soft key 
[CHANGELEVEL].
- To change the output protection level, type an output protection level, then press soft key [OUT 
LEVEL].
NOTE
1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a file cannot 
sometimes be deleted.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
sometimes be deleted.
2 The items that can be set vary depending on the status of options, parameters, 
and so on.
3 To change the display disable attribute, release protection of programs in 
advance. Set the same value as the password (parameter No. 3210 (PSW)) in 
parameter No. 3211 (KEY) to release the protection.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1066 -
11.11 SELECTING A MAIN PROGRAM
This section explains the procedure for selecting a main program.
Procedure for selecting a main program
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press the function key .
3 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
4 Move to the folder containing the file that you want to use as a main program.
Use the cursor keys and to move among folders. After selecting the folder, press the 
key.
5 Select the file that you want to use as the main program.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To select a file, use the cursor keys and .
6 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
7 Press the soft key [MAIN PROGRM].
"@" is displayed at the left of the program that has been selected as the main program.
(Fig.11.11 )
Fig.11.11 Selecting a main program (Program folder screen)
NOTE
1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, the main program 
cannot sometimes be selected.
2 In the multi-path system, "*" is displayed at the left of the program that has been


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1067 -
11.12 MAKING A PROGRAM COMPACT
This section explains the procedure for making a program compact.
Procedure for selecting a main program
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press the function key .
3 Press the soft key [FOLDER].
4 Move to the folder containing the file of the program that you want to make compact.
Use the cursor keys and to move among folders. After selecting the folder, press the 
key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
key.
5 Select the file of the program that you want to make compact.
To select a file, use the cursor keys and .
6 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
7 Press the soft key [PROGRM CNDENS].
When a program is made compact, the program size is updated.
NOTE
1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a program cannot 
sometimes be made compact.
2 Only programs on the CNC_MEM device can be made compact.
3 If bit 2 (CND) of parameter No. 3202 is set to 1, soft key [PROGRM CNDENS] is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1068 -
11.13 PROGRAM AND FOLDER COPY/MOVE FUNCTION
Overview
Programs and folders can be copied or moved from folder to folder.
Procedure for copying a program or a folder
1. Press the function key .
2. Press the chapter selection soft key [FOLDER]. 
The program folder screen in Fig.11.13 appears:
Fig.11.13 Program folder screen
3. Display the folder from which you want to copy or move the program or the folder. Move the cursor


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to the folder on the screen and press the key to move to the folder. Move the cursor to 
“RETURN TO UPPER FOLDER” on the screen and press the key to move the upper folder.
4. Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
5. Press the continuous menu key until the soft key [COPY] appears.
6. Move the cursor to the program or the folder that you want to select.
7. Press the soft key [COPY]. The program or folder is selected, and the background color becomes


key: chroma:document
string_value:
selected color (default: blue). If you want to move the program or the folder, press the soft key 
[CUT].
8. Display the folder to which you want to copy or move the program or folder.
9. Press the soft key [PASTE]. If you want to rename the program or folder, type new name before 
pressing [PASTE].
10. To copy a file or folder from the USB memory to the Data Server, press soft key [PROGRAM] or 
[DATA] to specify the attribute (program or data) of the copy destination file after pressing soft key


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[PASTE] of procedure 9. (Note 1) To rename and copy the file or folder, enter the new file or folder 
name in the key-in buffer before pressing soft key [PROGRAM] or [DATA].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1069 -
Procedure for copying some programs or folders 
Selection by range
1. Press the function key .
2. Press the chapter selection soft key [FOLDER].
3. Display the folder from which you want to copy or move the program or the folder. Move the cursor 
to the folder on the screen and press the key to move to the folder. Move the cursor to 
“RETURN TO UPPER FOLDER” on the screen and press the key to move the upper folder.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
5. Press the continuous menu key until the soft key [SELECT] appears.
6. Press the soft key [SELECT].
7. Press the soft key [RANGE SELECT]. In addition, move the cursor up and down to select the 
programs and the folders. The background color of selected programs and folders becomes selected 
color (default: blue).
8. If the selected range is determined, press the soft key [COPY]. If you want to move the program or 
folder, press the soft key [CUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9. Change the current folder to the destination folder.
10. Press the soft key [PASTE]. 
11. To copy a file or folder from the USB memory to the Data Server, press soft key [PROGRAM] or 
[DATA] to specify the attribute (program or data) of the copy destination file.(Note 1)
Selection by each program or folder
1. Press the function key .
2. Press the chapter selection soft key [FOLDER].
3. Display the folder from which you want to copy or move the program or the folder. Move the cursor


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to the folder on the screen and press the key to move to the folder. Move the cursor to 
“RETURN TO UPPER FOLDER” on the screen and press the key to move the upper folder.
4. Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
5. Press the continuous menu key until the soft key [COPY] appears.
6. Press the soft key [SELECT].
7. Move the cursor to program or folder to be copied.
8. Press the soft key [SELECT]. 
9. Repeat 7th and 8th operation until select is ended.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10. When selected programs or folders are determined, press the soft key [COPY]. If you want to move 
the program or folder, press the soft key [CUT]. 
11. Change the current folder to the destination folder.
12. Press the soft key [PASTE].
13. To copy a file or folder from the USB memory to the Data Server, press soft key [PROGRAM] or 
[DATA] to specify the attribute (program or data) of the copy destination file.(Note 1)
WARNING


key: chroma:document
string_value:
WARNING
When a file containing multiple programs is copied from the USB memory to the 
Data Server, the file is not divided into the programs and the programs are not 
registered individually on the Data Server. The programs are registered as one 
series of programs. Be sure to copy a file containing one program. Operating the 
machine after copying a file containing multiple programs is dangerous because 
the machine may behave unexpectedly.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1070 -
NOTE
1 The program (text file) attribute can be specified only when bit 1 (DUC) of 
parameter No. 24309 is set to 1. On the Data Server, various types of data can 
be saved in addition to text format NC programs. To handle text format NC 
programs, set the program (text file) attribute. To handle NC programs for NC 
data other than text format NC programs, set the data (binary file) attribute.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 To copy multiple files from the USB memory to the Data Server, do not select 
program files and data files simultaneously. When multiple files are selected, the 
specified attribute is set for all selected files. When a folder is selected, the 
specified attribute is also set for all files in the folder.
3 If the system is placed in other than the EDIT mode or emergency stop state 
during copy operation between the Data Server and USB memory, the copy


key: chroma:document
string_value:
operation is stopped. Do not change the mode during copy operation.
4 Files or folders may not be able to be copied, depending on the status such as 
operation state or protection state.
5 Programs or folders up to 10 can be selected.
About same name programs and folders 
When the same name of program or folder exists at the move destinations, confirmation message 
“OVERWRITE? (program or folder name)” is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- When the soft key [YES] is pressed, the program/folder is overwritten. If the same name 
programs/folders appear again, the confirmation message is displayed.
- When the soft key [NO] is pressed, copying or moving operation of the program/folder is skipped. If 
the same name programs/folders appear again, the confirmation message is displayed.
- When the soft key [YES ALL] is pressed, the program/folder is overwritten. Even if the same name 
programs/folders appear again, they are also overwritten.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- When soft key [NO ALL] is pressed, copying or moving operation of program/folder is skipped. If 
the same name programs/folders appear again, they are also skipped. 
- When the soft key [CANCEL] or [<] is pressed, copying or moving operation is canceled.
During the overwrite confirmation is displayed and the screen is changed, the move operation is canceled.
Deselecting programs/folders
When either of the following operations is performed, the selection state of program/folder is released.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Pressing of soft key [CANCEL] after performing a selecting operation.
- Change of the source folder before the selection state is fixed.
Restrictions
If the following conditions are corresponded, copy and move operation is invalid.
- The program data protection is enable.(The memory protect signal KEY3 is OFF)
- The top of the origin folder of copy/move or destination folder of copy/move has the edit disable 
attribute.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
attribute.
- The copy and move operation is performed to sub-folder of the copy/move origin folder.
- The copy destination program storage capacity is insufficient.
Programs and folders, which correspond to the following conditions, cannot be copied and moved.
- The copy/move origin or destinations programs/folders are protected by the edit disable attribute.
- The copy/move origin or destinations programs/folders are protected by 8 level data protection 
function.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
function.
- The copy/move destinations program is selected as a main program.
- The depth of the path is exceeded 6 classes after the folders are copied/moved.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1071 -
11.13.1 Copy and movement between different devices
Overview
It is enable to copy and move the files between different devices.
The files can be copied/moved in a same way.
Restrictions
About file operation restrictions on each device
A copy or movement between the following devices is possible.
Table11.13.1 Copy and movement between different devices
 Destination
Origin
CNC built-in memory Data server Memory card USB


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CNC built-in memory A A B B
Data server A A C A
Memory card program A A C C
Memory card B C C C
USB B A C C
A : Files and folders can be copied and moved
B : Files can be copied and moved. Folders cannot be copied and moved. 
(NOTICE: Memory card program device can be only copied.)
C : Programs and folders cannot be copied and moved.
About Memory card program, refer to "Selecting a Memory Card Program as a Device" in OPERATION.
NOTE
1 Memory card program device has following restrictions.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(a) Programs cannot be moved in memory card program device.
(b) Memory card program device cannot be used with memory card device.
2 Memory card device has following restrictions.
(a) Files cannot be moved.
(b) When the programs are copied, place all paths in the EDIT mode.
(c) When the programs are copied from CNC built-in memory device to memory 
card device, the behavior follows the setting of bit 1 (COW) of parameter 
No.11308.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
No.11308.
(d) When the programs are copied from memory card device to CNC built-in 
memory device, the behavior follows the setting of bit 2 (REP) of parameter 
No.3201.
(e) Memory card device cannot be used with memory card program device.
3 USB device has following restrictions.
(a) Files cannot be moved.
(b) When the programs are copied, place all paths in the EDIT mode.
4 Copying between data server and USB device has following restrictions.
(a) Files cannot be moved.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(a) Files cannot be moved.
(b)Please change all path to EDIT mode or emergency stop when you copy files.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1072 -
Copy of file including some programs
Copy other than between Data server and USB memory
When the file including some program is copied, don’t input the file name to the key input buffer. 
When some programs are included in the file of the copy origin, if the character string is input to the key 
input buffer, only the program of the head in the file is read to CNC MEM with program name input to 
the key input buffer.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the key input buffer.
Copy between Data server and USB memory
Even if the file includes two or more programs, it is copied as one file. Please select the soft key [DATA]
at the paste.
File name on memory card
When the program with 8 characters or more name of the program in the program memory on CNC is 
output, it is output on the memory card as follows.
For eight digits O numbers ('O'+ numeric parts)
- The numeric parts are 8 digits or more :


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The file name is changed to eight numerical value digits except first 'O'.
Example) O12345678 → 12345678
- The numeric parts are less than 8 digits :
One digit is deleted '0' and program name is changed to seven digits of 'O' + numerical value.
Example) O00012345 → O0012345
For arbitrary program name (9 characters or more)
- Program name is changed to the file name that rounds down since the ninth character.
Example) 123456789 → 12345678


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Example) 123456789 → 12345678
The file name output on the memory card might overlap by the above operation. In this case, it is output 
according to the setting of bit 1 (COW) of parameter No.11308.
11.13.2 Copy of program file with memory card device
Overview
In the program list screen, the program file can be input and output between the memory card connected 
as an external input-output device and program memory (CNC MEM) on CNC by the same operation as 
the copy of the program file.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
1 This function targets the memory card by the PCMCIA interface connected as an 
external input-output device.
2 Change to the following parameter setting to copy the program file between the 
memory cards.
 Parameter No.20-23 are set to 4.
 Bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No.0110 is set to 0.
When Bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No.0110 is set to 1, and sets the numbers of the 
input-output device other than the memory card to parameter No.20-23, warning "


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CHANGE EXTERNAL DEVICE TO MEMORYCARD" is occurred, and the file with 
the memory card cannot be copied.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1073 -
Explanation
・ CNC mode when the copy is operated
Change to the EDIT mode when you copy the file between different devices.
Moreover, the multi path system must change the entire path to the EDIT mode.
Warning "CHANGE TO EDIT MODE" is occurred excluding the EDIT mode.
・Selection of file
The file is selected according to the program file selection operation that becomes effective because of the 
bit 4 (PCB) of parameter No.11374 is set to 0.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The file that can be selected as a copy target is only a file in the same folder.
・Copy of program file
When the program file is copied from the program memory to the memory card, the selected program is 
output to the memory card. 
When the program file is copied from the memory card to the program memory, the selected file is read to 
the program memory.
・File that can be copied
The file that can be output to the memory card by the copy operation is only a program file on the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CNC-MEM device. Therefore, the file that exists in other devices except the CNC-MEM and folder 
cannot be output.
NOTE
Even if the folder has been selected when outputting it to the memory card, the 
folder is not output.
・Overwrite of program file
The file is overwritten according to the program file overwriting operation that becomes effective because 
of the bit 4 (PCB) of parameter No.11374 is set to 0.
NOTE
Operation when the file is pasted on the memory card operates according to the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
setting of bit 1 (COW) of parameter No.11308.
Operation when the file is pasted on the program memory of CNC operates 
according to the setting of bit 2 (REP) of parameter No.3201.
Restrictions
・File operation restrictions on devices
A copy or movement between the following devices is possible.
 CNC MEM
 MEM CARD (binary format)
(However, this device can only be selected as the copy source folder from which a file is read.)
 Data server
 Memory card


key: chroma:document
string_value:
 Data server
 Memory card
(However, This device can do only the copy operation with the CNC MEM device. 
Moreover, this device cannot be used together with MEM CARD.)
For devices other than the above, a copy or movement between them is impossible.
If an attempt is made to perform a copy or movement, the warning message "CAN NOT COPY/MOVE" 
appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1074 -
・Copy of file including some programs
Don’t input anything to the key input buffer when you copy the file including some programs.
When some programs are included in the file of the copy origin, if the character string is input to the key 
input buffer, only the program of the head in the file is read to CNC MEM with program name input to 
the key input buffer.
・File name on memory card


key: chroma:document
string_value:
・File name on memory card
When the program with 8 characters or more name of the program in the program memory on CNC is 
output, it is output on the memory card as follows.
For eight digits O numbers ('O'+ numeric parts)
 The numeric parts are 8 digits or more：
The file name is changed to eight numerical value digits except first 'O'.
Example) O12345678 → 12345678
 The numeric parts are less than 8 digits：


key: chroma:document
string_value:
One digit is deleted '0' and program name is changed to seven digits of 'O' + numerical value.
Example) O00012345 → O0012345
For arbitrary program name (9 characters or more)
 Program name is changed to the file name that rounds down since the ninth character.
Example) 123456789 → 12345678
The file name output on the memory card might overlap by the above operation. In this case, it is output 
according to the setting of bit 1 (COW) of parameter No.11308.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11.13.3 Deleting files in memory card device
Overview
The file on the memory card can be deleted according to the program file deletion operation that becomes 
effective because of the bit 4 (PCB) of parameter No.11374 is set to 0.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1075 - 
11.14 FOLDER MANAGEMENT 
This function restricts the folder operation in program management. As a result, operator can manage the 
program without the complex folder operation. Following two specifications can be selected by the 
parameter. 
1) The folders under the path folders can be used for program management. 
2) Only the path folders can be used for program management.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Path folders are the one of the initial folders. The folder exists under //CNC_MEM/USER, and the 
number is same to the system path. Please refer to "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in 
PROGRAMMING for details. 
2) 
1) 
/ 
SYSTEM/ 
MTB1/ 
MTB2/ 
USER/ 
PATH1/ 
CYLINDER/ 
PISTON/ 
PATH2/ 
GEAR1/ 
GEAR2/ 
//CNC_MEM 
LIBRARY/ 
User created folder 
Fig. 11.14 Folder that can be used by each setting


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1076 -
11.14.1 Program Management under the Path Folder
If parameter FPF (No.11302#6) is set to 1, the operation on the program folder screen becomes as follows.
At this time, it is necessary to set parameter CFP (No.11304#7) to 0.
Table 11.14.1 Restriction of operation
Operation Working
Moving of the folder Under the path folder Possible
Upper from the path folder Impossible
Creating of user folder Possible


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Changing of foreground default folder Possible
Changing of background default folder Possible
Display on program folder screen
Only the folder under the path folder corresponding to selected path can be displayed. 
Warning message “CAN’T MOVE TO FOLDER” is displayed and cannot move when the folder is 
operated to move upper from the path folder.
Setting of foreground/background default folder
Only the folder under the path folder corresponding to selected path can be set to foreground/background


key: chroma:document
string_value:
default folder.
11.14.2 Program Management only in the Path Folder
If parameter CFP (No.11304#7) is set to 1, the operation on the program folder screen becomes as follows.
At this time, the setting of parameter FPF (No.11302#6) is invalid.
Table 11.14.2 Restriction of operation
Operation Working
Moving of the folder Under the path folder Impossible
Upper from the path folder Impossible
Creating of user folder Impossible
Changing of foreground default folder Impossible


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Changing of background default folder Impossible
Display on program folder screen
Only the path folder corresponding to selected path can be displayed. “RETURN TO UPPER FOLDER”
is not displayed. (Refer to “1)” in Fig. 11.14.2 (a) and Fig. 11.14.2 (b).)
The subfolder that has already been made under the path folder before the parameter CFP(No.11304#7) is 
made effective can be displayed. But it is impossible to move to the subfolder.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1077 -
Fig. 11.14.2 (a) Program folder screen (parameter CFP(No.11304#7)=0)
Fig. 11.14.2 (b) Program folder screen (parameter CFP(No.11304#7)=1)
Display of device name and current folder
The current folder name is not displayed though the device name is displayed so far. (Refer to “2)” in Fig.
11.14.2 (a) and Fig. 11.14.2 (b).)
Display and setting of foreground/background default folder


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Foreground/background default folders are not displayed. (Refer to “3)” in Fig. 11.14.2 (a) and Fig.
11.14.2 (b).)
Moreover, foreground/background default folders cannot be set.
CAUTION
Set foreground/background default folder to each path folder before the 
parameter CFP(No.11304#7) is made effective.
(3)
(1) (2)
(3)
(1) (2)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1078 -
Soft key that is not displayed
The following soft key is not displayed, and cannot be operated.
- CREATE FOLDER 1)
- FORE CHANGE 2)
- BACK CHANGE 3)
Fig11.14.2 (c) Soft key display for CNC_MEM device
11.14.3 Folder for Subprogram/Macro Calls
In the following subprogram call/macro call, the folder /USER/LIBRARY, /MTB12, /MTB2 and 
/SYSTEM are searched before the folder where there is the main program are searched.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
There is a possibility being executed for the subprogram that the operator doesn't intend if the subprogram 
is registered to the above-mentioned folder even if the display and the operation are limited by this 
function.
- Subprogram call based on an M code
- Subprogram call based on a particular address
- Subprogram call based on a second auxiliary function code
- Macro call based on an S code
- Macro call based on a T code
- Macro call based on a G code
- Macro call based on an M code


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- One-touch macro call
By setting 1 to the parameter SCC (No.3457#6), the folder where there is the main program is added to 
the top of search order. 
1) Folder where the main program is stored. ← Added.
2) Common program folder of initial folder
3) MTB-dedicated folder 2 of initial folder
4) MTB-dedicated folder 1 of initial folder
5) System folder of initial folder
The folders of 2) though 5) can be excluded from search target folders by setting the parameters


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1079 -
11.15 PROGRAM VERIFICATION
This function enables to verify the differences of the programs in the I/O device and the programs in the 
CNC built-in memory.
Sequence of program verification
1. Make sure the I/O device is ready for input and output.
2. Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.
3. The program data protection is enabled on the machine operator’s panel.(Turn off the memory protect 
signal KEY3)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
signal KEY3)
4. Press the function key and display the program list screen.
5. Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
6. Press the continuous menu key . 
7. Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
8. Set the file name in the I/O devices.
Input the file name and press the soft key [F NAME].
If the file name is not set, “ALL-PROG.TXT” is set.
9. Set the program name in the NC memory.
Input program name and press the soft key [P SET].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the program name is not specified, the program names in the file which is set in above ‘8’ are set.
10. Press the soft key [EXEC].
Program verification is started and the “COMPARE” is blinked in lower right. When verification 
finishes, “COMPARE” disappears.
If the program in the I/O device and the program in the CNC built-in memory are same, the message 
“PROGRAM HAS BEEN VERIFIED” is displayed.
If they are different, the alarm (PS0079) “PROGRAM NOT MATCH” is issued
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
If 8 level data protection function is valid, this function cannot be used.
Explanation
When one program is registered in a file
If one program is registered in the file, the program in the file and the program that is specified by [P
SET] are verified. 
If the program in the CNC built-in memory is not specified by [P SET], the program whose program 
name is same as program in the file are verified.
When some programs are registered in a file


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Each program in the file which is specified by [F SET] and the program whose program name is same as 
the program name in the file are verified. When all verifications succeed, the message “PROGRAM HAS 
BEEN VERIFIED” is displayed.
NOTE
When the program is specified by [P SET], the alarm (PS0079) is issued as long 
as all of programs in the file are same as the program which is set by [P SET].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1080 -
11.16 HIGH-SPEED PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
When many kinds of machining are arranged, this function can achieve the short processing time when
many programs are registered collectively or all programs are deleted. The program is not saved
automatically to nonvolatile memory at registration, modification, or deletion of program.
If the power supply is turned off without saving, the changed programs data is not saved. Please execute


key: chroma:document
string_value:
following sequence of program save when the programs are saved. 
Sequence of program save
1. The program edit screen or the program folder screen is displayed. 
2. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and the continuous menu key several times. Soft key [ALL SAVE] appears.
[Program edit screen]
[Program folder screen]
3. Press soft key [ALL SAVE]. The following softkey is displayed. 
4. When the soft key [EXEC] is pressed, the saving program is begun. When the soft key [CAN] is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
pressed, the saving program is discontinued. 
5. While saving changes, the status "ALLSAVE" flashes.
6. When the status "ALLSAVE" disappears, saving is completed.
NOTE
1 There are no changes about the method of displaying programs and the editing
programs.
2 In cases that this function is enabled, if the power supply is turned off without 
saving, the changed programs data is not saved.
The program selection by the following operation also is not saved.
- MDI operation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- MDI operation
- External workpiece number search
- External program number search
Please perform saving operation by program edit screen, program folder 
screen, signal or the application by FOCAS2/ C Language Library, if it is 
necessary to preserve the changed programs data/ the program selection 
after the power supply is turned off.
3 When the automatic operation is executing in any path, the save operation is 
not executed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
not executed.
4 If the power supply is turned off during saving the programs, all programs are
deleted. In this case, an alarm PS0519, “PROGRAM FILES ARE BROKEN 
AND CLEARED” occurs when the power supply is turned on next.
5 This function is effective only on CNC program storage memory (CNC_MEM 
device).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1081 -
12 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
To operate a CNC machine tool, various data must be set on the MDI unit for the CNC. The operator can 
monitor the state of operation with data displayed during operation.
This chapter describes how to display and set data for each function.
Explanation
- Screen transition chart
The screen transition for when each function key on the MDI unit is pressed is shown below. The


key: chroma:document
string_value:
subsections referenced for each screen are also shown. See the appropriate subsection for details of each 
screen and the setting procedure on the screen. See other chapters for screens not described in this 
chapter.
See Chapter, “ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS” for the screen that appears when 
function key is pressed. In general, function key or is prepared by the machine tool 
builder and used for macros. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for the screen that


key: chroma:document
string_value:
appears when function key or is pressed.
- Data protection key
The machine may have a data protection key to protect part programs, tool compensation values, setting 
data, and custom macro variables. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for where the 
data protection key is located and how to use it.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1082 -
Screen displayed when the function key is pressed 
(for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)
ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT) Page 1 +
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
   
Position 
display in
the 
workpiece 
coordinate 
system ⇒ See III-12.1.1
Position 
display in
the 
workpiece 
coordinate 
system ⇒ See III-12.1.1
Position 
display in
the 
workpiece 
coordinate 
system ⇒ See III-12.1.1
Manual 
handle 
interruption ⇒ See III-4.7
Actual


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Actual 
feedrate 
display ⇒ See III-12.1.5
Actual 
feedrate 
display ⇒ See III-12.1.5
Actual 
feedrate 
display ⇒ See III-12.1.5
Display of
run time
and parts
count ⇒ See III-12.1.6
Display of
run time
and parts
count ⇒ See III-12.1.6
Display of
run time
and parts
count ⇒ See III-12.1.6
MONI 3-D
MANUAL (OPRT) Page 2 +
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
 
Operating 
monitor 
display ⇒ See III-12.1.8
Display of 
3-dimensio
nal manual 
feed ⇒ See III-12.1.9


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1083 -
Screen displayed when the function key is pressed 
(for 15/19-inch display unit)
Page 1
(1) ALL ⇒
Overall position
display
⇒ See III-12.1.10
Actual feedrate 
display
⇒ See 
III-12.1.12
Display of run 
time and parts 
count
⇒ See III-12.1.13
(2) HANDLE ⇒
Manual handle 
interruption
⇒ See III-4.7
(3) MONITO
R ⇒
Operating 
monitor display
⇒ See III-12.1.15
(4) 3-D 
MANUAL ⇒
Display of 
3-dimensional 
manual feed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1084 -
Screen displayed when the function key is pressed 
(for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)
PROGRA
M
FOLDER NEXT CHECK (OPRT) Page 1 +
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
  
Editing 
programs ⇒ See III-10
Current 
block 
display 
screen ⇒ See III-12.2.5
Program 
check 
screen ⇒ See III-12.2.6
Next block 
display 
screen ⇒ See III-12.2.5
TIME JOG RESTRT ROBOT
SELECT
(OPRT) Page 2 +
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

Robot 
connection 
function


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Robot 
connection 
function
⇒ See Robot and
Machine Tool
Integration
Function
OPERATOR'S
MANUAL


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1085 -
Screen displayed when the function key is pressed 
(for 15/19-inch display unit)
Page 1
(1) PROGRM ⇒
Editing Programs
⇒ See III-10
(2) FOLDER
Program folder 
screen
⇒ See III-12.2.13
(3) CHECK ⇒
Program check 
screen
⇒ See III-12.2.15
(4) NEXT ⇒
Current block 
display screen
⇒ See III-12.2.14
Next block display 
screen
⇒ See III-12.2.14
(5) TIME
Stamping the 
machining time
⇒ See III-12.2.17
(6) JOG
(7) RESTAR
T


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1086 -
Page 2
(8) ROBOT
SELECT ⇒
Robot connection 
function
⇒ See Robot and
Machine Tool
Integration Function
OPERATOR'S
MANUAL
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1087 -
Screen displayed when the function key is pressed 
(for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)
OFFSET SETTIN
G 
WORK (OPRT) Page 1 +
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
  
Setting and 
displaying the 
tool offset 
value
⇒ See III-2.1.1*1
Displaying 
and entering 
setting data
⇒ See III-12.3.1
Displaying 
and setting 
the workpiece 
origin offset 
value
⇒ See III-12.3.4
MACRO PATTER
N MENU
OPR TOOL M
ANAGER (OPRT) Page 2 +


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ANAGER (OPRT) Page 2 +
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
  
Displaying 
and setting 
custom macro 
common 
variables
⇒ See III-12.3.6
Displaying 
and setting 
pattern data 
inputs
⇒ See III-12.3.17
Displaying 
and setting 
the software 
operator's 
panel
⇒ See III-12.3.8
Setting and 
displaying tool 
management 
data
⇒ See III-12.3.9
OFST.2 W.SHFT GEOM.2 (OPRT) Page 3 +
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
  
Y-axis offset
⇒ See III-2.1.7
*1
Setting the 
workpiece 
coordinate 
system shift


key: chroma:document
string_value:
coordinate 
system shift 
value
⇒ See III-2.1.5
*1
Setting tool 
compensation/ 
second 
geometry 
offset values
⇒ See III-2.1.6
*1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1088 -
PR-LV EXTEND
OFFSET (OPRT) Page 4 +
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
MACHIN
LEVEL
QUALTY
SELECT
or
or
 
Precision 
level selection
⇒ See III-12.3.12
Setting the 
4th/5th axis 
offset
⇒ See III-2.1.8*1

Machining
level selection
⇒ See III-12.3.13

Machining 
quality level
selection
⇒ See III-12.3.14
CHUCK 
TAIL
LANG. PROTECT GUARD (OPRT) Page 5 +
(21) (22) (23) (24) (25)
   
Chuck and 
tail stock 
barriers


key: chroma:document
string_value:
tail stock 
barriers
⇒ See III-2.1.9*1
Displaying 
and switching 
the display 
language
⇒ See III-12.3.10
Protection of 
data at eight 
levels
⇒ See III-12.3.11
Operation 
confirmation 
functions
⇒ See III-6.7


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1089 -
Screen displayed when the function key is pressed 
(for 15/19-inch display unit)
Page 1 Page 2
(1) OFFSET ⇒
Setting and 
displaying the tool 
offset value
⇒ See III-2.1.1*1 (8) 2ND 
GEOM ⇒
Setting tool 
compensation/seco
nd geometry offset 
values
⇒ See III-2.1.6*1
(2) SETTIN
G ⇒
Displaying and 
entering setting data
⇒ See III-12.3.23 (9) TOOL
FORM
(3) WORK ⇒
Displaying and 
setting the 
workpiece origin 
offset value


key: chroma:document
string_value:
offset value
⇒ See III-12.3.26
(10) CHOPPI
NG
(4) MACRO ⇒
Displaying and 
setting custom 
macro common 
variables
⇒ See III-12.3.28
(11) CHUCK
TAIL ⇒
Chuck and tail 
stock barriers
⇒ See III-2.1.9*1
(5) OPERAT
PANEL ⇒
Displaying and 
setting the software 
operator’s panel
⇒ See III-12.3.30
(12) LANGUA
GE ⇒
Displaying and 
switching the 
display language
⇒ See III-12.3.32
(6) Y OFFS
ET ⇒
Y-axis offset
⇒ See III-2.1.7*1 (13) PROTEC
T ⇒
Protection of data 
at eight levels


key: chroma:document
string_value:
at eight levels
⇒ See III-12.3.33
(7) WORK
SHIFT ⇒
Setting the 
workpiece 
coordinate system 
shift value
⇒ See III-2.1.5*1
(14) GUARD ⇒
Operation 
confirmation 
functions
⇒ See III-6.7
NEXT
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1090 -
Page 3
(15)
PRECI
LEVEL MACHIN
LEVEL
QUALTY
SELECT ⇒
Precision 
level selection
⇒ See 
III-12.3.34
Machining 
level selection
⇒
See III-12.3.35
Machining 
quality level 
selection
⇒
See 
III-12.3.36
(16)
TOOL
LIFE ⇒
Setting and displaying 
tool management data
⇒ See III-12.3.31
(17) F-ACT
(18)
F-OFFS
ET
(19)
(20)
WORK
SET ER
(21)
NEXT
PAGE
or or


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1091 -
Screen displayed when the function key is pressed 
(for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)
PARAME
TER
DIAGNO
SIS
SERVO 
GUIDE
SYSTEM (OPRT) Page 1 +
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
  
Displaying 
and setting 
parameters
⇒ See III-12.4.1
Checking by 
self-diagnosis 
screen
⇒ See III-7.3
SERVO 
GUIDE Mate
⇒ See
Maintenance 
Manual
MEMORY PITCH
ERROR
SERVO 
PARAM
SPINDL
SETING (OPRT) Page 2 +
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
   


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
   
Displaying 
memory data ⇒ See III-12.4.9
Servo 
parameters
⇒ See III-12.4.2
Spindle 
setting
⇒ See III-12.4.4
PMC
MAINTE
PMC
LADDER
PMC
CONFIG (OPRT) Page 3 +
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
MCNG
TUNING
ALL IO ALL IO OPERAT
HISTRY (OPRT) Page 4 +
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
  
Machining 
parameter 
tuning
⇒ See III-12.4.8
Input/ output 
on the all IO 
screen
⇒ See III-8.3
Input/ output 
on the all IO 
screen
⇒ See III-8.3


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1092 -
COLOR PERIOD
MAINTE
MAINTE
INFO
WAVE
DIAG (OPRT) Page 5 +
(21) (22) (23) (24) (25)

Color setting 
screen
⇒ See III-12.4.7
FSSB PARAM
TUNING
P.MATE
MGR. (OPRT) Page 6 +
(26) (27) (28) (29) (30)
 
FSSB data 
display and 
setting screen
⇒ See 
Maintenance 
Manual
Parameter 
tuning
⇒ See III-12.4.10
EMBED
PORT
PCMCIA
LAN
ETHER
NET
PROFI
MASTER (OPRT) Page 7 +
(31) (32) (33) (34) (35)
   
Embedded


key: chroma:document
string_value:
   
Embedded 
Ethernet
function
⇒ See 
MAINTENANCE 
MANUAL
Embedded 
Ethernet 
function
⇒ See 
MAINTENANCE 
MANUAL
Ethernet 
function
⇒ See 
Fast Ethernet / 
Fast Data Server 
OPERATOR’S 
MANUAL
PROFIBUS
-DP Master 
function
⇒ See 
PROFIBUS-DP 
Board 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL
REMOTE
DIAG
M CODE 3D ERR
COMP (OPRT) Page 8 +
(36) (37) (38) (39) (40)
  
Machine 
Remote 
Diagnosis
function
⇒ See 
MAINTENANCE 
MANUAL
M code 
grouping 
function
⇒Ⅱ-11.3.1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1093 -
PROFI
SLAVE
DEVNET
MASTER
FL-net
1CH
DEVNET
SLAVE (OPRT) Page 9 +
(41) (42) (43) (44) (45)
   
PROFIBUS
-DP Slave 
function
⇒ See 
PROFIBUS-DP 
Board 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL
DeviceNet 
Master 
function
⇒ See 
DeviceNet Board 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL
FL-net 
function
⇒ See 
FL-net Board 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL
DeviceNet 
Slave 
function
⇒ See 
DeviceNet Board 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL
DUAL
CHECK
R.TIME


key: chroma:document
string_value:
MANUAL
DUAL
CHECK
R.TIME
MACRO (OPRT) Page 10 +
(46) (47) (48) (49) (50)
 
Dual Check 
Safety 
diagnosis 
data
⇒ Dual Check 
Safety 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL 
( B-64483EN-2)
Real time 
custom macro
⇒Ⅱ-12.3.7
ID-INF (OPRT) Page 11 +
(51) (52) (53) (54) (55)

CCLink
REMOTE
ROBOT
STATUS
ROBOT
CON. (OPRT) Page 12 +
(56) (57) (58) (59) (60)
  
CC-Link 
function
⇒ See 
CC-Link Board 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL
Robot 
connection 
function
⇒ See Robot and
Machine Tool
Integration


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Machine Tool
Integration
Function
OPERATOR'S
MANUAL
Robot 
connection 
function
⇒ See Robot and
Machine Tool
Integration
Function
OPERATOR'S
MANUAL


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1094 -
USB FL-net
2CH (OPRT) Page 13 +
(61) (62) (63) (64) (65)
 
USB 
function
⇒ See 
MAINTENANCE 
MANUAL
FL-net 
function
⇒ See 
FL-net Board 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL
NOTE
For information about a dedicated screen for each path control type in the lathe 
system/machining center system, refer to the manuals:
*1: OPERATOR’S MANUAL (T series) (B-64694EN-1)
*2: OPERATOR’S MANUAL (M series) (B-64694EN-2)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1095 -
Screen displayed when the function key is pressed 
(for 15/19-inch display unit)
Page 1 Page 2
(1) PARAME
TER ⇒
Displaying and 
setting parameters
⇒ See III-12.4.14 (8) PMC
MAINTE
(2) DIAGNO
SIS ⇒
Checking by 
self-diagnosis 
screen
⇒ See III-7.3
(9) LADDER
(3) SERVO
GUIDE ⇒
SERVO GUIDE 
Mate
⇒ See Maintenance
Manual
(10) PMC
CONFIG
(4) MEMORY ⇒
Displaying memory 
data
⇒ See III-12.4.22 (11)
(5) PITCH


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(5) PITCH
ERROR (12) COLOR ⇒
Color setting 
screen
⇒ See III-12.4.20
(6) SERVO
PARAM ⇒
Servo parameters
⇒ See III-12.4.15 (13) PERIOD
MAINTE
(7) SPINDL
SETING ⇒
Spindle setting
⇒ See III-12.4.17 (14) MAINTE
INFO
NEXT
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1096 -
Page 3 Page 4
(15) FSSB ⇒
FSSB data display 
and setting screen
⇒ See 
Maintenance
Manual
(22) M CODE
GROUP ⇒
M code grouping 
function
⇒ See II-11.3.1
(16) MCHN
TUNING ⇒
Machining 
parameter tuning
⇒ See III-12.4.21 (23) EMBED
PORT ⇒
Embedded 
Ethernet function
⇒ See 
MAINTENANCE 
MANUAL
(17) WAVE
DIAG (24) PCMCIA
LAN ⇒
Embedded 
Ethernet function
⇒ See 
MAINTENANCE 
MANUAL
(18) OPERAT
HISTRY (25) ETHER


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(18) OPERAT
HISTRY (25) ETHER
NET ⇒
Ethernet function
⇒ See Fast 
Ethernet / Fast 
Data Server 
OPERATOR’S 
MANUAL
(19) ALL IO ⇒
Input/ output on 
the all IO screen
⇒ See III-8.3
(26) PROFI
MASTER ⇒
PROFIBUS-DP 
Master function
⇒ See 
PROFIBUS-DP 
Board 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL
(20) ALL IO ⇒
Input/ output on 
the all IO screen
⇒ See III-8.3
(27) PROFI
SLAVE ⇒
PROFIBUS-DP 
Slave function
⇒ See 
PROFIBUS-DP 
Board 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL
(21) PARAM
TUNING ⇒
Parameter tuning


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1097 -
Page 5 Page 6
(29) P.MATE
MGR. (36)
(30) SYSTEM (37) DEVNET
MASTER ⇒
DeviceNet Master 
function
⇒ See DeviceNet
Board 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL
(31) REMOTE
DIAG ⇒
Machine Remote 
Diagnosis function
⇒ See Fast Ethernet 
/ Fast Data Server 
OPERATOR’S 
MANUAL
(38) FL-net
1CH ⇒
FL-net function
⇒ See FL-net 
Board 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL
(32) DUAL
CHECK ⇒
Dual Check Safety
diagnosis data
⇒ See Dual Check 
Safety


key: chroma:document
string_value:
⇒ See Dual Check 
Safety 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL 
(B-64483EN-2)
(39) DEVNET
SLAVE ⇒
DeviceNet Slave 
function
⇒ See DeviceNet
Board 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL
(33) R.TIME
MACRO ⇒
Displaying and 
setting real time 
custom macro 
data 
⇒ See III-12.3.29
(40) CUSTOM
BOARD
(34) HI-PIT
CH ERR (41)
(35) PARTS
LEARN (42)
NEXT
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1098 -
NOTE
For information about a dedicated screen for each path control type in the lathe 
system/machining center system, refer to the manuals:
*1: OPERATOR’S MANUAL (T series) (B-64694EN-1)
*2: OPERATOR’S MANUAL (M series) (B-64694EN-2)
Page 7 Page 8
(43) ID-INF (50) CCLink
REMOTE ⇒
CC-Link function
⇒ See CC-Link 
Board 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL
(44) (51)
(45) (52) ROBOT
STATUS ⇒
Robot connection 
function
⇒ See Robot and


key: chroma:document
string_value:
function
⇒ See Robot and
Machine Tool
Integration
Function
OPERATOR'S
MANUAL
(46) (53) ROBOT
CON. ⇒
Robot connection 
function
⇒ See Robot and
Machine Tool
Integration
Function
OPERATOR'S
MANUAL
(47) (54)
(48) (55) USB ⇒
USB function
⇒ See 
MAINTENANCE 
MANUAL
(49) (56) FL-net
2CH ⇒
FL-net function
⇒ See FL-net 
Board 
CONNECTION 
MANUAL
NEXT
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1099 -
12.1 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY
Section 12.1, "SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ", consists of the following
subsections:
Screens of an 8.4/10.4-inch display unit
Press function key to display the current position of the tool.
The following three screens are used to display the current position of the tool:
- Current position display screen for the workpiece coordinate system.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Current position display screen for the relative coordinate system.
- Current overall position display screen.
The above screens can also display the feedrate, run time, and the number of parts. In addition, a floating 
reference position can be set on these screens.
Function key can also be used to display the load on the servo motor and spindle motor and the 
rotation speed of the spindle motor (operating monitor display).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Function key can also be used to display the screen for displaying the distance moved by handle 
interruption. See Section, “MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION” for details on this screen.
On any of the position display screens, the status (such as D, I, L, S, *, or M) of an axis is indicated on 
the left of the axis name to prevent wrong operations. See "Axis status display" in Section, "WRONG 
OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTIONS" for details.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1100 -
12.1.1 Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System
Displays the current position of the tool in the workpiece coordinate system. The current position changes 
as the tool moves. The least input increment is used as the unit for numeric values. The title at the top of 
the screen indicates that absolute coordinates are used.
Display procedure for the current position screen in the workpiece coordinate
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [ABSOLUTE]. 
3 Press soft key [ABSOLUTE] again. The sixth and subsequent axes are displayed.
Fig. 12.1.1 (a) Current position (absolute) screen (M series)(10.4-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.1.1 (b) Current position (absolute) screen (T series)(10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1101 -
Explanation
- Display including compensation values
M
Bits 6 (DAL) and 7 (DAC) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to select whether the displayed values 
include tool length compensation and cutter compensation.
T
Bit 1 (DAP) of parameter No. 3129 and bit 7 (DAC) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to select whether 
the displayed values include tool offset and tool nose radius compensation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12.1.2 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System
Displays the current position of the tool in a relative coordinate system based on the coordinates (see 
Explanation) set by the operator. The current position changes as the tool moves. The increment system is 
used as the unit for numeric values.
The title at the top of the screen indicates that relative coordinates are used.
Display procedure for the current position screen with the relative coordinate 
system
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
system
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [RELATIVE]. 
3 Press soft key [RELATIVE] again. The sixth and subsequent axes are displayed.
Fig. 12.1.2 (a) Current position (relative) screen (M series)(10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1102 -
Fig. 12.1.2 (b) Current position (relative) screen (T series) (10.4-inch display unit)
See Explanation for the procedure for setting the coordinates.
Explanation
- Setting the relative coordinates
The current position of the tool in the relative coordinate system can be reset to 0 or preset to a specified 
value as follows.
Normal decimal point input and Pocket calculator type decimal point input can be selected by bit 0 (DPI)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
of parameter.No.3401.
Resetting relative coordinates to 0
When all axes are reset to 0
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection key [RELATIVE] to display the relative coordinate screen.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Press soft key [ORIGIN].
5 Press soft key [ALL AXIS].
The relative coordinates of all axes are reset to 0.
When a specified axis is reset to 0
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection key [RELATIVE] to display the relative coordinate screen.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1103 -
4 Press soft key [ORIGIN].
5 Input the axis name of the resetting axis.
The axis name blinks.
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
The relative coordinate is reset to 0.
Presetting relative coordinates
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection key [RELATIVE] to display the relative coordinate screen.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Input the axis name of the presetting axis.
The axis name blinks.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The axis name blinks.
5 Input the coordinates value, and press soft key [PRESET].
The relative coordinate is preset by input coordinate value.
NOTE
1 When the preset of the specified axis is done in the following states, warning is 
displayed.
- When only the numerical value is input or the character that is not the axis 
name is input
Waning massage: “THERE IS NO SPECIFIED NAME OF AXIS”
- When input form is except for “axis name + numerical value” is done
Waning massage: ”FORMAT ERROR”


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Waning massage: ”FORMAT ERROR”
2 When axis name display is changed by parameter No.3132, specify the changed 
axis name.
- Display including compensation values
M
Bits 4 (DRL) and 5 (DRC) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to select whether the displayed values 
include tool length compensation and cutter compensation.
T
Bit 0 (DRP) of parameter No. 3129 and bit 5 (DRC) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to select whether 
the displayed values include tool offset and tool nose radius compensation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Presetting by setting a coordinate system
M
Bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to specify whether the position indication values in the 
absolute coordinate system are preset as those in the relative coordinate system during coordinate system 
setting or manual reference position return by the G92 command.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1104 -
T
Bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to specify whether the position indication values in the 
absolute coordinate system are preset as those in the relative coordinate system during coordinate system 
setting or manual reference position return by the G50 command (for G code system A) or G92 command 
(for G code system B or C).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(for G code system B or C).
If parameter bit PPD is set to 0, by setting bit 5 (PWR) of parameter No. 11277 to 1, it is possible to 
preset the relative coordinates at power-on in the machine coordinate system.
12.1.3 Overall Position Display
Displays the following positions on a screen : Current positions of the tool in the workpiece coordinate 
system, relative coordinate system, and machine coordinate system, and the remaining distance.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The relative coordinates can also be set on this screen. See Subsection, “Position Display in the Relative 
Coordinate System” for the procedure.
Procedure for displaying overall position display screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [ALL]. 
3 Press soft key [ALL] again. The sixth and subsequent axes are displayed.
Fig. 12.1.3 (a) Current position (overall) screen (M series) (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1105 -
Fig. 12.1.3 (b) Current position (overall) screen (T series) (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Coordinate display
The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems are displayed at the same time:
- Current position in the relative coordinate system (relative coordinate)
- Current position in the workpiece coordinate system (absolute coordinate)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Current position in the machine coordinate system (machine coordinate)
- Distance to go (distance to go)
- Distance to go
The distance remaining is displayed in the MEM or MDI mode. 
The distance the tool is yet to be moved in the current block is displayed.
- Machine coordinate system
The least command increment is used as the unit for values displayed in the machine coordinate system. 
However, the least input increment can be used by setting bit 0 (MCN) of parameter No. 3104.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Resetting the relative coordinates
The total position display screen also supports the resetting of the relative coordinates to 0 or presetting of 
them to specified values. See the procedure for resetting the relative coordinates described in 
Subsection, “Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1106 -
12.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset
If a workpiece coordinate system has been shifted with manual intervention or any other operation, an 
MDI operation can be performed to preset the system to a workpiece coordinate system that is offset by a 
workpiece origin offset, from the machine zero point that has been set before the shifting.
A command (G92.1) can be programmed to preset a workpiece coordinate system. (See Subsection,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
“Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1)”.)
Procedure for the workpiece coordinate system preset
Procedure
When all axes are performed to preset
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [ALL] or [ABSOLUTE].
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [WK COORD] appears.
5 Press soft key [WK COORD].
6 Press soft key [ALL AXIS].
When a specified axis is performed to preset
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [ALL] or [ABSOLUTE].
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [WK COORD] appears.
5 Press soft key [WK COORD].
6 Enter the axis name ( , , ...) and zero ( ).
7 Press soft key [EXEC].
Explanation
- Operation mode
This function can be executed when the reset state or automatic operation stop state is entered, regardless 
of the operation mode.
- Presetting relative coordinates
As with absolute coordinates, bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 is used to specify whether to preset


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1107 -
12.1.5 Actual Feedrate Display
The actual feedrate on the machine can be displayed on a current position display screen or program 
check screen.
The Actual Feedrate Display is switched to feed per minute / feed per revolution by combination of bit 3 
(GSC) of parameter No.3107, bit 5 (FSS) of parameter No.3191, operation status and G code modal.
GSC FSS Operation status Modal G code Display unit
0 - - - Feed per minute
1 0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0 - - - Feed per minute
1 0
Manual feed
Manual per revolution 
feed
Rapid traverse
Dry run
- Feed per minute
Manual feed
Manual per revolution 
feed
Rapid traverse
other than dry run
M series :G93, G94
T series :G98(G code system A)
G93, G94(G code system B,C)
Feed per minute
M series :G95
T series :G99 (G code system A)
G95 (G code system B,C)
Feed per revolution
1 - - Feed per revolution
Feed per minute and feed per revolution example are as follows.
<Feed per minute>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<Feed per minute>
<Feed per revolution> 
The display of inch and millimeter is switched by the bit2(INI) of parameter No.0 of input unit.
Relationship between the bit2(INI) of parameter No.0 of input unit and the display unit of feed par minute 
/ feed per revolution are shown in the following table.
Feed par minute Feed per revolution
mm (INI=0) MM/MIN MM/REV
inch (INI=1) INCH/M INCH/R


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1108 -
Display procedure for the actual feedrate on the current position display screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key to display a current position display screen. At the location indicated 
by , an actual feedrate is displayed.
Fig. 12.1.5 (a) Current position (absolute) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millimeter/min or inch/min (depending on the specified least


key: chroma:document
string_value:
input increment) under the display of the current position.
Explanation
- Actual feedrate value
The actual rate (per minuts) is calculated by the following expression:
∑=
n
i 1
2 Fact� (fi)
n : Number of axes
fi : Cutting feed rate in the tangential direction of each axis or rapid traverse rate
Fact : Actual feedrate displayed
The display unit:
mm/min (metric input)
inch/min (Inch input, two digits below the decimal point are displayed.)
- Actual feedrate display of rotary axis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the case of movement of rotary axis, the speed is displayed in units of deg/min but is displayed on the 
screen in units of input system at that time. For example, when the rotary axis moves at 50 deg/min, the 
following is displayed: 50 mm/min (in metric input) or 0.50 inch/min (in inch input).
- Actual feedrate display on the other screen
The program check screen also displays the actual feedrate.
- Number of decimal places


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Number of decimal places
The number of decimal places of feed per minute is set by the parameter No.3135.
The number of decimal places of feed per revolution feedrate is as follows.
In case of mm input, number of decimal places displayed 2 digits
In case of inch input, number of decimal places displayed 3 digits
* Digit number is fixed. It is not possible to be changed by parameters etc.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1109 -
12.1.6 Display of Run Time and Parts Count
The run time, cycle time, and the number of machined parts are displayed on the current position display 
screens.
Procedure for displaying run time and parts count on the current position display screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key to display a current position display screen. At the location indicated 
by , a run time and parts count are displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.1.6 (a) Current position (relative) screen (M series) (10.4-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.1.6 (b) Current position (relative) screen (T series) (10.4-inch display unit)
The number of machined parts (PART COUNT), run time (RUN TIME), and cycle time (CYCLE TIME) 
are displayed under the current position.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1110 -
Explanation
- PART COUNT
Indicates the number of machined parts. The number is incremented each time M02, M30, or an M code 
specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
- RUN TIME
Indicates the total run time during automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time.
- CYCLE TIME
Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time. This is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
automatically preset to 0 when a cycle start is performed at reset state. It is preset to 0 even when power is 
removed.
- Display on the other screen
Details of the run time and the number of machined parts are displayed on the setting screen. See 
Subsection, “Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time”.
- Parameter setting
The number of machined parts and run time cannot be set on current position display screens. They can


key: chroma:document
string_value:
be set by parameters Nos. 6711, 6751, and 6752 or on the setting screen.
- Incrementing the number of machined parts
Bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is used to specify whether the number of machined parts is 
incremented each time M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed, or only 
each time an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1111 -
12.1.7 Operating Monitor Display
The load meter for a servo axis can be displayed. Also, the load meter and speed meter for a serial spindle 
can be displayed.
To enable this function, bit 5 (OPM) of parameter No. 3111 must be set to 1.
Procedure for displaying the operating monitor
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press continuous menu key .
3 Press soft key [MONITOR].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press soft key [MONITOR]. 
Fig. 12.1.7 (a) Operating monitor (M series) (10.4-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.1.7 (b) Operating monitor (T series) (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1112 -
Explanation
- Display of the servo axes
Servo axis load meters as many as the maximum number of controlled axes of the path can be displayed. 
One screen displays load meters for up to five axes at a time. By pressing the soft key [MONITOR], load 
meters for the 6th axis and up are displayed. 
- Display of the spindle axes
When serial spindles are used, the reading on the load meter and speedometer can be displayed only for


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the main serial spindle.
- Unit of graph
The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to 200% (only a value is displayed for load exceeding 
200%). 
The bar graph for the speedometer shows the ratio of the current spindle speed to the maximum spindle 
speed (100%).
- Load meter
The reading on the load meter depends on servo parameter No. 2086 and spindle parameter No. 4127. 
- Speedometer


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Speedometer
Although the speedometer normally indicates the speed of the spindle motor, it can also be used to indicate 
the speed of the spindle by setting bit 6 (OPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1.
The spindle speed to be displayed during operation monitoring is calculated from the speed of the spindle 
motor (see the formula below). 
The spindle speed can therefore be displayed, during operation monitoring, even when no position coder is
used.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
used. 
To display the correct spindle speed, however, the maximum spindle speed for each gear (spindle speed at 
each gear ratio when the spindle motor rotates at the maximum speed) must be set in parameters Nos. 3741 
to 3744.
The input of the clutch and gear signals for the first serial spindle is used to determine the gear which is 
currently selected. Control the input of the CTH1A and CTH2A signals according to the gear selection, 
by referring to the table below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(Formula for calculating the spindle speed to be displayed)
Maximum spindle speed 
Maximum speed of with the gear being used
spindle motor
Speed of spindle motor Spindle speed displayed 
during operation monitoring = ×
The following table lists the correspondence between clutch and gear selection signals CTH1A and 
CTH2A, used to determine the gear being used, and parameters:
CTH1A CTH2A Parameter Serial spindle specification
0 0 =No.3741 (Maximum spindle speed with gear 1) HIGH


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0 1 =No.3742 (Maximum spindle speed with gear 2) MEDIUM HIGH
1 0 =No.3743 (Maximum spindle speed with gear 3) MEDIUM LOW
1 1 =No.3744 (Maximum spindle speed with gear 4) LOW
The speed of the spindle motor and spindle can be displayed, during operation monitoring, only for the 
first serial spindle and the spindle switching axis for the first serial spindle. It cannot be displayed for the 
second spindle.
- Color of graph
If the value of a load meter exceeds 100%, the bar graph turns purple.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1113 -
12.1.8 Display of 3-dimensional Manual Feed (Tool Tip Coordinates, 
Number of Pulses, Machine Axis Move Amount)
M
The absolute coordinates of the tool tip, the number of pulses, and a machine axis move amount based on 
3-dimensional manual feed are displayed.
Displaying the screen for 3-dimensional manual feed
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display the soft key [3-D MANUAL].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press the soft key [3-D MANUAL] to display the screen of 3-dimensional manual feed.
Fig. 12.1.8 (a) 3-dimensional manual feed screen(10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Tool tip position
The addresses of the three basic machine configuration axes for performing 3-dimensional manual feed 
and the current position of the tool tip are displayed.
- Tool axis reference (number of pulses)
TD
The amount of travel in the tool axis direction in tool axis direction handle feed, tool axis direction


key: chroma:document
string_value:
jog feed, or tool axis direction incremental feed is displayed.
The unit is the least input increment of the axis in the direction specified by parameter No. 19697.
R1
The amount of travel in the first axis direction in tool axis right-angle direction handle feed, tool axis 
right-angle direction jog feed, or tool axis right-angle direction incremental feed is displayed.
The unit is the least input increment of the axis in the first axis direction normal to the direction


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1114 -
R2
The amount of travel in the second axis direction in tool axis right-angle direction handle feed, tool 
axis right-angle direction jog feed, or tool axis normal direction incremental feed is displayed.
The unit is the least input increment of the axis in the second axis direction normal to the direction 
specified by parameter No. 19697.
- Tool tip center (number of pulses)
C1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
C1
The angular displacement in tool tip center rotation handle feed, tool tip center rotation jog feed, or 
tool tip center rotation incremental feed for rotation of the first rotary axis is displayed. The unit is 
the least input increment of the first rotary axis.
C2
The angular displacement in tool tip center rotation handle feed, tool tip center rotation jog feed, or 
tool tip center rotation incremental feed for rotation of the second rotary axis is displayed. The unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
is the least input increment of the second rotary axis.
- Table reference (number of pulses)
VR
The amount of travel in the table reference vertical direction in table reference vertical direction 
handle feed, table reference vertical direction jog feed, or table reference vertical direction 
incremental feed is displayed.
The unit is the least input increment of the axis in the direction specified by parameter No. 19697.
H1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
H1
The amount of travel in the first axis direction in table reference horizontal direction handle feed, 
table reference horizontal direction jog feed, or table reference horizontal direction incremental feed 
is displayed.
The unit is the least input increment of the axis in the first axis direction normal to the direction 
specified by parameter No. 19697.
H2
The amount of travel in the second axis direction in table reference horizontal direction handle feed,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
table reference horizontal direction jog feed, or table reference horizontal direction incremental feed 
is displayed.
The unit is the least input increment of the axis in the second axis direction normal to the direction 
specified by parameter No. 19697.
- Amounts of machine axis travel
The addresses of machine configuration axes used for 3-dimensional manual feed and the sum of the 
amount of travel of each axis used for 3-dimensional manual feed are displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The values of the basic three axes (X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis), the first rotary axis, and the second rotary 
axis are displayed in this order.
For the definition of the first rotary axis and second rotary axis, see the description of parameter No. 
19680.
When bit 0 (CLR) of parameter No. 13113 is set to 1, the displayed data is cleared by a reset.
- Absolute coordinates, machine coordinates
The absolute coordinates and machine coordinates of all axes are displayed. If too many axes are involved


key: chroma:document
string_value:
for display on one screen, the remaining axes can be displayed by pressing the soft key [3-D MANUAL] 
for page feed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1115 -
- F (feedrate)
- When bit 3 (CFD) of parameter No. 13113 is set to 0
The composite feedrate at a control point on a linear axis or rotary axis is displayed.
- When bit 3 (CFD) of parameter No. 13113 is set to 1
The feedrate of the tool tip is displayed.
Operation
The display of the number of pulses can be cleared by soft key operations.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Select the soft key corresponding to a function subject to clearing of the amount of travel. 
Pressing the rightmost soft key displays the second page.
3 Press soft key [ERASE] to clear the amount of travel of the specified function. Press soft key [CAN] 
to cancel erase operation.
Screens of a 15/19-inch display unit
Press function key to display the current overall position display screen that shows the current 
position of the tool.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
position of the tool.
The above screen can also display the feedrate, run time, and the number of parts. In addition, a floating 
reference position can be set on this screen.
Function key can also be used to display the load on the servo motor and spindle motor and the 
rotation speed of the spindle motor (operating monitor display).
Function key can also be used to display the screen for displaying the distance moved by handle


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1116 -
12.1.9 Overall Position Display (15/19-inch Display Unit)
Displays the following positions on a screen : Current positions of the tool in the workpiece coordinate 
system, relative coordinate system, and machine coordinate system, and the remaining distance. 
The relative coordinates can also be set on this screen. (Refer to Explanation.)
Procedure for displaying overall position display screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [ALL]. 
Fig. 12.1.9 (a) Current position screen (M series) (15-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.1.9 (b) Current position screen (T series) (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1117 -
Explanation
- Coordinate display
The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems are displayed at the same time:
- Current position in the relative coordinate system (relative coordinate)
- Current position in the work coordinate system (absolute coordinate)
- Current position in the machine coordinate system (machine coordinate)
- Distance to go (distance to go)
- Distance to go


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Distance to go
The distance remaining is displayed in the MEM or MDI mode. 
The distance the tool is yet to be moved in the current block is displayed.
- Machine coordinate system
The least command increment is used as the unit for values displayed in the machine coordinate system. 
However, the least input increment can be used by setting bit 0 (MCN) of parameter No. 3104.
- Setting the relative coordinates


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The current position of the tool in the relative coordinate system can be reset to 0 or preset to a specified 
value as follows.
Normal decimal point input and Pocket calculator type decimal point input can be selected by bit 0 (DPI) 
of parameter.No.3401.
Resetting relative coordinates to 0
When all axes are reset to 0
1 Press function key .
2 Press horizontal soft key [ORIGIN].
3 Press horizontal soft key [ALL AXIS].
The relative coordinates of all axes are reset to 0.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When a specified axis is reset to 0
1 Press function key .
2 Press horizontal soft key [ORIGIN].
3 Input the axis name of the resetting axis.
The axis name blinks.
4 Press horizontal soft key [EXEC].
The relative coordinate is reset to 0.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1118 -
Presetting relative coordinates
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Input the axis name of the presetting axis.
The axis name blinks.
3 Input the coordinates value, and press horizontal soft key [PRESET].
The relative coordinate is preset by input coordinate value.
NOTE
1 When the preset of the specified axis is done in the following states, warning is 
displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed.
- When only the numerical value is input or the character that is not the axis 
name is input
Waning massage: “THERE IS NO SPECIFIED NAME OF AXIS”
- When input form is except for “axis name + numerical value” is done
Waning massage: “FORMAT ERROR”
2 When axis name display is changed by parameter No.3132, specify the changed 
axis name.
- Display including compensation values
M
The following parameters can be used to determine whether the displayed values include tool length


key: chroma:document
string_value:
compensation and cutter compensation.
- Workpiece coordinate system: Bits 6 (DAL) and 7 (DAC) of parameter No. 3104
- Relative coordinate system: Bits 4 (DRL) and 5 (DRC) of parameter No. 3104
T
The following parameters can be used to determine whether the displayed values include tool offset and 
tool nose radius compensation.
- Workpiece coordinate system: Bit 1 (DAP) of parameter No. 3129 and bit 7 (DAC) of parameter No. 
3104


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3104
- Relative coordinate system: Bit 0 (DRP) of parameter No. 3129 and bit 5 (DRC) of parameter No. 
3104
- Presetting by setting a coordinate system
M
Bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to specify whether the position indication values in the 
absolute coordinate system are preset as those in the relative coordinate system during coordinate system 
setting or manual reference position return by the G92 command.
T


key: chroma:document
string_value:
T
Bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to specify whether the position indication values in the 
absolute coordinate system are preset as those in the relative coordinate system during coordinate system 
setting or manual reference position return by the G50 command (for G code system A) or G92 command 
(for G code system B or C).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1119 -
12.1.10 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (15/19-inch Display 
Unit)
If a workpiece coordinate system has been shifted with manual intervention or any other operation, an 
MDI operation can be performed to preset the system to a workpiece coordinate system that is offset by a 
workpiece origin offset, from the machine zero point that has been set before the shifting.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A command (G92.1) can be programmed to preset a workpiece coordinate system. (See Subsection, 
“Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1)”.)
Procedure for the workpiece coordinate system preset
Procedure
When all axes are performed to preset
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [ALL].
3 Press soft key [WK COORD].
4 Press soft key [ALL AXIS].
When a specified axis is performed to preset
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [ALL].
3 Press soft key [WK COORD].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press soft key [WK COORD].
4 Enter the axis name ( , , ...) and zero ( ).
5 Press soft key [EXEC].
Explanation
- Operation mode
This function can be executed when the reset state or automatic operation stop state is entered, regardless 
of the operation mode.
- Presetting relative coordinates
As with absolute coordinates, bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 is used to specify whether to preset 
relative coordinates (RELATIVE).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1120 -
12.1.11 Actual Feedrate Display (15/19-inch Display Unit)
The actual feedrate on the machine (per minute) can be displayed on a current position display screen or 
program check screen. 
Display procedure for the actual feedrate on the current position display screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key to display a current position display screen. At the location indicated 
by , an actual feedrate is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.1.11 (a) Current position screen (M series) (15-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.1.11 (b) Current position screen (T series) (15-inch display unit)
The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millimeter/min or inch/min (depending on the specified 
least input increment) under the display of the current position.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1121 -
Explanation
- Actual feedrate value
The actual rate is calculated by the following expression:
∑=
n
i 1
2 Fact� (fi)
n : Number of axes
fi : Cutting feed rate in the tangential direction of each axis or rapid traverse rate
Fact : Actual feedrate displayed
The display unit:
mm/min (metric input)
inch/min (Inch input, two digits below the decimal point are displayed.)
- Actual feedrate display of feed per revolution


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the case of feed per revolution and thread cutting, the actual feedrate displayed is the feed per minute 
rather than feed per revolution.
- Actual feedrate display of rotary axis
In the case of movement of rotary axis, the speed is displayed in units of deg/min but is displayed on the 
screen in units of input system at that time. For example, when the rotary axis moves at 50 deg/min, the 
following is displayed: 50 mm/min (in metric input) or 0.50 inch/min (in inch input).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Actual feedrate display on the other screen
The program check screen also displays the actual feedrate.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1122 -
12.1.12 Display of Run Time and Parts Count (15/19-inch Display 
Unit)
The run time, cycle time, and the number of machined parts are displayed on the current position display 
screens.
Procedure for displaying run time and parts count on the current position display screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key to display a current position display screen. At the location indicated 
by , a run time and parts count are displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.1.12 (a) Current position screen (M series) (15-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.1.12 (b) Current position screen (T series) (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1123 -
The number of machined parts (PART COUNT), run time (RUN TIME), and cycle time (CYCLE TIME) 
are displayed under the current position.
Explanation
- PART COUNT
Indicates the number of machined parts. The number is incremented each time M02, M30, or an M code 
specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
- RUN TIME
Indicates the total run time during automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time.
- CYCLE TIME


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- CYCLE TIME
Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time. This is 
automatically preset to 0 when a cycle start is performed at reset state. It is preset to 0 even when power is 
removed.
- Display on the other screen
Details of the run time and the number of machined parts are displayed on the setting screen. See
Subsection, “Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time (15/19-inch Display Unit)”.
- Parameter setting


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Parameter setting
The number of machined parts and run time cannot be set on current position display screens. They can 
be set by parameters Nos. 6711, 6751, and 6752 or on the setting screen.
- Incrementing the number of machined parts
Bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is used to specify whether the number of machined parts is 
incremented each time M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed, or only 
each time an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1124 -
12.1.13 Operating Monitor Display (15/19-inch Display Unit)
The load meter for each servo axis can be displayed. Also, the load meter and speed meter for a serial 
spindle can be displayed.
To enable this function, bit 5 (OPM) of parameter No. 3111 must be set to 1.
Procedure for displaying the operating monitor
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [MONITOR].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.1.13 (a) Operating monitor (M series) (15-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.1.13 (b) Operating monitor (T series) (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1125 -
Explanation
- Display of the servo axes
Servo axis load meters as many as the maximum number of controlled axes of the path can be displayed. 
One screen displays load meters for up to five axes at a time. By pressing the vertical soft key
[MONITOR], load meters for the 6th axis and up are displayed. 
- Display of the spindle axes
When serial spindles are used, the reading on the load meter and speedometer can be displayed only for


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Speedometer
Although the speedometer normally indicates the speed of the spindle motor, it can also be used to indicate 
the speed of the spindle by setting bit 6 (OPS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1.
The spindle speed to be displayed during operation monitoring is calculated from the speed of the spindle 
motor (see the formula below). 
The spindle speed can therefore be displayed, during operation monitoring, even when no position coder is 
used.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0 1 =No.3742 (Maximum spindle speed with gear 2) MEDIUM HIGH
1 0 =No.3743 (Maximum spindle speed with gear 3) MEDIUM LOW
1 1 =No.3744 (Maximum spindle speed with gear 4) LOW
The speed of the spindle motor and spindle can be displayed, during operation monitoring, only for the 
first serial spindle and the spindle switching axis for the first serial spindle. It cannot be displayed for the 
second spindle.
- Color of graph
If the value of a load meter exceeds 100%, the bar graph turns red.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1126 -
12.1.14 Display of 3-dimensional Manual Feed (Tool Tip Coordinates, 
Number of Pulses, Machine Axis Move Amount) (15/19-inch 
Display Unit)
M
The absolute coordinates of the tool tip, the number of pulses, and a machine axis move amount based on 
3-dimensional manual feed are displayed.
Displaying the screen for 3-dimensional manual feed
Procedure
1 Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
2 Press the vertical soft key [3-D MANUAL] to display the screen of 3-dimensional manual feed.
Fig. 12.1.14 (a) 3-dimensional manual feed screen(15-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Tool tip position
The addresses of the three basic machine configuration axes for performing 3-dimensional manual feed 
and the current position of the tool tip are displayed.
- Tool axis reference (number of pulses)
TD


key: chroma:document
string_value:
TD
The amount of travel in the tool axis direction in tool axis direction handle feed, tool axis direction 
jog feed, or tool axis direction incremental feed is displayed.
The unit is the least input increment of the axis in the direction specified by parameter No. 19697.
R1
The amount of travel in the first axis direction in tool axis right-angle direction handle feed, tool axis 
right-angle direction jog feed, or tool axis right-angle direction incremental feed is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The unit is the least input increment of the axis in the first axis direction normal to the direction 
specified by parameter No. 19697.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1127 -
R2
The amount of travel in the second axis direction in tool axis right-angle direction handle feed, tool 
axis right-angle direction jog feed, or tool axis normal direction incremental feed is displayed.
The unit is the least input increment of the axis in the second axis direction normal to the direction 
specified by parameter No. 19697.
- Tool tip center (number of pulses)
C1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
C1
The angular displacement in tool tip center rotation handle feed, tool tip center rotation jog feed, or 
tool tip center rotation incremental feed for rotation of the first rotary axis is displayed. The unit is 
the least input increment of the first rotary axis. For the definition of the first rotary axis, see the 
description of parameter No. 19680.
C2
The angular displacement in tool tip center rotation handle feed, tool tip center rotation jog feed, or


key: chroma:document
string_value:
tool tip center rotation incremental feed for rotation of the second rotary axis is displayed. The unit
is the least input increment of the second rotary axis. For the definition of the second rotary axis, see 
the description of parameter No. 19680.
- Table reference (number of pulses)
VR
The amount of travel in the table reference vertical direction in table reference vertical direction 
handle feed, table reference vertical direction jog feed, or table reference vertical direction


key: chroma:document
string_value:
incremental feed is displayed.
The unit is the least input increment of the axis in the direction specified by parameter No. 19697.
H1
The amount of travel in the first axis direction in table reference horizontal direction handle feed, 
table reference horizontal direction jog feed, or table reference horizontal direction incremental feed 
is displayed.
The unit is the least input increment of the axis in the first axis direction normal to the direction 
specified by parameter No. 19697.
H2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
H2
The amount of travel in the second axis direction in table reference horizontal direction handle feed, 
table reference horizontal direction jog feed, or table reference horizontal direction incremental feed 
is displayed.
The unit is the least input increment of the axis in the second axis direction normal to the direction 
specified by parameter No. 19697.
- Amounts of machine axis travel
The addresses of machine configuration axes used for 3-dimensional manual feed and the sum of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
amount of travel of each axis used for 3-dimensional manual feed are displayed.
The values of the basic three axes (X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis), the first rotary axis, and the second rotary 
axis are displayed in this order.
For the definition of the first rotary axis and second rotary axis, see the description of parameter No. 
19680.
When bit 0 (CLR) of parameter No. 13113 is set to 1, the displayed data is cleared by a reset.
- Absolute coordinates, machine coordinates


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The absolute coordinates and machine coordinates of all axes are displayed. If too many axes are involved 
for display on one screen, the remaining axes can be displayed by pressing the vertical soft key [3-D 
MANUAL] for page feed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1128 -
- F (feedrate)
- When bit 3 (CFD) of parameter No. 13113 is set to 0
The composite feedrate at a control point on a linear axis or rotary axis is displayed.
- When bit 3 (CFD) of parameter No. 13113 is set to 1
The feedrate of the tool tip is displayed.
Operation
The display of the number of pulses can be cleared to 0 with horizontal soft keys.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Select the horizontal soft key corresponding to a function for which the display of the amount of 
travel is to be cleared.
2 Press horizontal soft key [ERASE] to clear the display of the amount of travel of the specified 
function, or press horizontal soft key [CAN] to cancel the operation.
12.2 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY
Screens of a10.4-inch display unit
This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function key . The screens include a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
program editing screen, program folder list display screen, and screens for displaying the command states 
of the program currently being executed.
1. Program screen
2. Program folder screen
3. Next block display screen
4. Program check screen
On the program screen, you edit the program that is currently selected, and display the block that is 
currently executed during program operation. In MDI mode, you also edit an MDI operation program, 
and display the block that is currently executed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1129 -
12.2.1 Program Contents Display
Displays the program currently being executed in MEM mode.
Displaying the program being executed
Procedure
1 Press function key to display the program screen.
2 Press chapter selection soft key [PROGRAM]. 
The cursor is positioned at the block currently being executed.
Fig. 12.2.1 (a) Screen for displaying the program being executed (10.4-inch display unit)
12.2.1.1 Displaying the executed block (BC)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Overview
When the program being executed is displayed, one executed block can be displayed. This function can 
be enabled by setting bit 3 (FPD) of parameter No. 11308.
The program screen shows the following:
- Executed block
- Block being executed
- Look-ahead block(*)
- Non-look-ahead block
(*) For details on look-ahead, see the explanation "Program look-ahead" below.
The executed block is displayed on the top of the screen, and ">" is shown in front of the block being


key: chroma:document
string_value:
executed, across which the cursor is placed. Below the block being executed, look-ahead blocks are 
displayed. Below them, non-look-ahead blocks are displayed.
There is a dividing line between the look-ahead blocks and the non-look-ahead blocks.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1130 -
Fig. 12.2.1.1 (a) Screen for displaying the program being executed (MDI mode)
Fig. 12.2.1.1 (b) Screen for displaying the program being executed (MEM mode)
Explanation
- Program look-ahead
When an automatic operation cycle starts, a program is executed as described below.
<1> The command of one block is read from the specified program.
<2> The read command is analyzed and converted to executable data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<3> The command of the block is executed.
During execution of the command, steps <1> and <2> are performed for the next block in advance. Upon 
completion of the current block, execution of the next block can be started immediately. This processing 
is referred to as look-ahead or buffering.
The number of look-ahead blocks depends on the processing status or parameters.
Look-ahead block
Executed block
Block being executed
Non-look-ahead 
block
Dividing line


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1131 -
12.2.1.2 Text display
Overview
Setting bit 1 (APD) of parameter No. 11350 can select whether to display the contents of the running NC 
program in the look-ahead or text mode.
In the look-ahead mode (APD = 0):
Displays look-ahead blocks and non-look-ahead blocks in the running NC program.
In the text mode (APD = 1):
Displays blocks in the running NC program that is in the program memory. The displayed blocks


key: chroma:document
string_value:
include the block just before the block being executed.
(Example)
Fig. 12.2.1.2 (a) shows the display in the look-ahead mode and Fig. 12.2.1.2 (b) shows the display in 
the text mode when block N4 in program O0099 shown below is being executed.
 
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 12.2.1.2 (a) Display when block N4 is being executed (look-ahead mode)
Fig. 12.2.1.2 (b) Display when block N4 is being executed (text mode)
The macro statement 
is not displayed.
The macro variable 
number is displayed 
as is.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
number is displayed 
as is.
The comment is displayed.
The macro statement is 
displayed.
A decimal point is added to the numeric value.
The comment is not 
displayed.
The macro variable 
number is replaced 
with a numeric value.
Look-ahead blocks
O0099
N1 G91 G00 X100.
N2 Z100.
N3 #501 = 100.
N4 Y-100.
IF[#1 GT 10] GOTO 7
N5 Y#501 (COMMENT)
N6 M98 P9100 
N7 G90 X100
N8 G300 
N9 G00 X0Y0
N10 M30
Running program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1132 -
External subprogram call
Setting bit 7 (DPD) of parameter No. 11356 can select whether to display the contents of the running 
external subprogram by DNC operation or M198 in the look-ahead or text mode.
However, text mode is effective when the number of look-ahead blocks is only less than 5.
When the number of look-ahead blocks is 5 or more, look-ahead mode is effective.
12.2.1.3 Call stack display
Overview


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Overview
In the call stack display, the program name and nest level of subprogram from main program to current 
executing subprogram is displayed. When the device to which program is stored is a CNC build-in 
memory, the program comment is displayed in addition to a program name and a nest level. Moreover, 
the folder name where the program is stored is displayed in the active program now.
Call stack display 
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [CHECK].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the soft key [CHECK].
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Press the soft key until soft key [CALL STK ON] appears.
Fig.12.2.1.3 (a) Program check screen (10.4-inch) (Non call stack display)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1133 -
5 Press the soft key [CALL STK ON].
Fig.12.2.1.3 (b) Program check screen (10.4-inch) (Call stack display) 
A part of the program check screen changes into the call stack.
Moreover, softkey [CALL STK ON] changes into softkey [CALL STKOFF]. 
6 The screen returns to Fig.12.2.1.3 (a) by pressing the soft key [CALL STKOFF].
Explanation
In the call stack, nest level and program name and program comment of subprogram from main program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to program being executed is displayed. Moreover, about the program being executed, in addition to 
program name and program comment, the folder information is displayed.
The following items are displayed on the screen.
Table12.2.1.3 Item of call stack display
Content of display Explanation
NEST LEVEL Level of subprogram calling from main program to program being executed is displayed 
by the number. 
The main program is displayed in the line of nest level 01.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PROGRAM NAME The name of subprogram called from the main program is displayed.
And when all calling program cannot be displayed within the area, it is displayed from 
the one with large number of nest level.
Moreover, the folder where the program is stored is displayed for the active program.
The head of the folder is a device name.
PROGRAM COMMENT In case of CNC build-in memory, Program comment is displayed in parentheses at the 
right of program name.
Call stack display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1134 - 
Example of screen 
When the block of the cursor position is executed by the subprogram call from the main program that 
exists in the figure below, 
<MAIN_PROG>(MAIN PROGRAM) 
⋅
⋅
M98 <SUB_PROG_1> 
⋅
⋅
M30
<SUB_PROG_1>(SUB1 PROGRAM) 
⋅
⋅
M98 <SUB_PROG_2> 
⋅
⋅
M99
<SUB_PROG_2>(SUB2 PROGRAM) 
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
M99
Fig.12.2.1.3 (c) Example of subprogram call 
The call stack is displayed as shown in the figure below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig.12.2.1.3 (d) Call stack display 
NOTE 
1 When the storing number of program name and program comment and the 
folder information exceed display area, the exceed part is displayed by the “…”. 
2 As for MDI program, the program name is displayed as O0000 in the call stack. 
3 As for External program, the folder where the program is stored is not displayed 
and the top of program path name is displayed as “//DNC” in the call stack.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 The programs of external subprogram call (M198) and execution macro are not 
displayed in the call stack. 
5 In the multi-path system simultaneous display, the call stack display can not be 
performed on the same screen. However, if single-path display mode is set (bit 3 
(MTS) of parameter No.11355#3 is 1), the call stack can be displayed. 
12.2.1.4 Display interpreted and original programs on the same 
screen 
Overview


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen 
Overview 
The input custom macro programs before conversion (original) and after conversion (interpreted) are 
displayed on the program check screen at the same time. 
If bit 5 (EPC) of parameter No.11356 is set to 1, this function becomes effective. 
NEST LEVEL PROGRAM NAME PROGRAM COMMENT 
G01 X100. Z50. ;


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1135 -
Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [CHECK].
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Press the soft key until soft key [INTERPRETED] appears.
Fig.12.2.1.4 (a) Program check screen (10.4-inch)
(Non display interpreted and original programs on the same screen)
5 Press the soft key [INTERPRETED].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The original program display is switched to the simultaneous display of interpreted program and 
original program. 
And the soft key [INTERPRETED] is changed to [ORIGINAL].
Fig.12.2.1.4 (b) Program check screen (10.4-inch) 
(Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen)
6 The screen returns to Fig.12.2.1.4 (a) by pressing the soft key [ORIGINAL].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1136 -
Explanation
- For interpreted program
The program after the custom macro program is calculated is displayed.
Both the block being executed now and the block executed next to the executing block are displayed.
When the block executed next is a call command of the subprogram such as M98, called program is 
displayed.
- For original program
The program before the custom macro program is calculated is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The blocks displayed before and after the active block are displayed in the order of registration in the 
memory.
The block is not necessarily a block executed last time, or, the block is not necessarily a block that will be 
executed next time either.
The difference point of the original program and the interpreted program is as follows.
Table12.2.1.4 The difference point of the original program and the interpreted program 
Comment Macro program Macro Variable Decimal Point Subprogram call


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Interpreted
Program
Not displayed Not displayed Value stored in 
macro variable
Least increment 
system
Not displayed
(Example) G01 (Not displayed) G01 X123.456 ; G01 X1.000 ; (Not displayed)
Original
Program
Displayed Displayed Macro variable The decimal point 
position is the same 
as the input.
Displayed
(Example) G01 
(COMMENT)
IF [#1 GT 10]
GOTO 20
G01 X#100 ; G01 X1. ; M98P1000;
Example of screen
Fig.12.2.1.4 (c) Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
1 In case of the program stored in internal memory (CNC MEM) and the program 
in memory card program device (MEMCARD), the interpreted and original 
programs are displayed on the same screen.
2 Protected programs and execution macro programs are not displayed.
3 The interpreted program is displayed in the area of the original program display
during DNC operation.
Interpreted program
Original program
Executing block
Executing block
Next executing block
Next block
Previous block


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1137 -
NOTE
4 In operating of single block, the cursor shows the executed block. The cursor 
doesn’t move to the next block.
5 In the multi-path system simultaneous display, the display interpreted and 
original programs can not be performed on the same screen.
Restrictions
This function cannot be used at the same time with the following functions.
- Manual Handle Retrace
- Retrace
12.2.2 Editing a Program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12.2.2 Editing a Program
A program can be edited in the EDIT mode.
Two modes of editing are available. One mode is word editing, which performs word-by-word editing. 
The other is character editing, which performs character-by-character editing.
For program creation and editing operation, see Chapter III-9, “CREATING PROGRAMS” and Chapter 
III-10, “EDITING PROGRAMS”.
Displaying the program editing screen
Procedure
1 Press function key to display the program screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press chapter selection soft key [PROGRAM]. 
- Word editing
Editing operations such as text insertion, modification, and deletion, and cursor movements are performed 
on a word-by-word basis.
Fig. 12.2.2 (a) Program word editing screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1138 -
- Character editing
Program editing operations and cursor movements are performed on a character-by-character basis as 
with a general text editor.
Text is input directly to the cursor position instead of using the key input buffer.
Fig. 12.2.2 (b) Program character editing screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Switching between program editing modes
You can switch between word editing and character editing with soft keys.
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure
1 Press function key to display the program screen.
2 Press chapter selection soft key [PROGRAM]. 
3 Press operation soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Pressing operation soft key [CHANGE EDITOR] switches the editing mode between word editing 
and character editing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1139 -
12.2.3 Program Screen for MDI Operation
During MDI operation or editing of an MDI operation program in the MDI mode, the program currently 
being executed mode is displayed.
For MDI operation, see Section III-4.2, “MDI Operation”.
Procedure for displaying the program screen for MDI operation
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection soft key [PROGRAM]. 
The program input from the MDI is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1140 -
12.2.4 Program Folder Screen
A list of programs registered in the program memory is displayed.
For the program folder screen, see Chapter III-11, “PROGRAM MANAGEMENT”.
Displaying the program folder screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection soft key [FOLDER].
Fig. 12.2.4 (a) Program folder screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Displaying comments on the program folder screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The comments of the first block of the program are displayed by setting bit 1 (COL) of parameter No. 
11351 to 1.
Fig.12.2.4 (b) Displaying comments on the program folder screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1141 -
12.2.4.1 Split display on the program folder screen
Overview
On the program folder screen, the folder information display can be split into two folder information 
views, upper and lower, as shown in the Fig. 12.2.4.1 (a). This function is enabled by setting bit 1 (MLD) 
of parameter No. 11318 to 1.
Fig. 12.2.4.1 (a) Program folder screen (split-display screen)(10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
On the split folder display, file information about different sets of devices or folders can be shown in 
different views at the same time, so you can copy or move files easily.
Example of copying a file from the CNC MEM to the Data Server
<2>
<1>
<3> <4>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1142 -
Procedure
<1> Change to a destination folder on the Data Server.
<2> Change to a folder on the CNC_MEM that contains a file you want to copy.
<3> Select the file.
<4> Copy the file.
Procedure for switching to split display
Procedure
1 Press function key to display the program folder screen.
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 
3 Press continuous menu key twice.
Soft key [MULTI LIST] appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Soft key [MULTI LIST] appears.
Fig. 12.2.4.1 (b) Program folder screen (normal screen)(10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1143 -
4 Press soft key [MULTI LIST]. 
The folder information display is split into two folder views, upper and lower, which show the same 
folder information. Immediately after the splitting, the upper folder view becomes active for 
operations. At the same time, soft key [SINGLE LIST] appears.
Fig. 12.2.4.1 (c) Program folder screen (split-display screen)(10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Pressing soft key [SINGLE LIST] takes you back to the original program folder display.
Then, the folders are shown which have been selected in the active view for operations on the split 
display.
Procedure for switching between active folder views for file operations on the split display
On the split folder display, you can switch between active folder views for file operations as described 
below.
In the active folder view for file operations, the cursor is displayed on the file list.
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure
1 When the upper folder view is active for file operations and you press MDI key and cursor 
key , the lower folder view becomes active for file operations.
2 When the lower folder view is active for file operations and you press MDI key and cursor 
key , the upper folder view becomes active for file operations.
NOTE
- In step 1, even if you press MDI key and cursor key when the upper 
folder view is active for file operations, the lower folder view becomes active for 
file operations.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
file operations.
- In step 2, even if you press MDI key and cursor key when the lower 
folder view is active for file operations, the upper folder view becomes active for 
file operations.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1144 - 
Explanation 
 - File operations on the split display 
The following operations are allowed on the split display. 
<1> You can select and display devices or folders individually in each folder view. 
<2> You can copy or move files between folders selected in different folder views. 
(For details, see the section on operations of copying/moving between devices.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the selected folder view, you can perform the same operations as on the normal screen. 
 - Path switching 
When path switching is performed while the split display is provided for a multi-path system, the folder 
view in which the CNC_MEM is selected as a device is changed to a view of the last selected folder for 
each path on the CNC_MEM. 
 - Device information display 
The device information as shown in the normal program folder screen (portion in a dotted box in the Fig.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12.2.4.1 (d)) is not shown on the split display (Fig. 12.2.4.1 (c)). 
Fig. 12.2.4.1 (d) Program folder screen (normal screen)(10.4-inch display unit) 
You should see the device information on the normal screen. 
Limitation 
 - Device that can be selected in both views at the same time on the split display 
The same device of any of the following types can be selected in both views at the same time on the split 
display. 
- CNC MEM 
- MEM CARD(binary format) 
- Data Server


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Data Server 
For other types, the same device cannot be selected for display in the folder views at the same time. 
If any other type of device is selected when split display starts, the upper and lower folder views cannot 
show the same sets of folders due to the above limitation. Therefore, the lower folder view shows the 
folder selected as a foreground folder.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1145 -
- Display units that support the split display
The split display is supported on 10.4-inch, 15-inch, and 19-inch display units.
12.2.4.2 Folder tree display
Overview
The folder tree can be displayed on program folder screen. By using this function, it is easy to manage
programs of each folder.
The folder tree is available in the program memory device (CNC_MEM), the USB device, the memory


key: chroma:document
string_value:
card program device (MEMCARD), and the data server device.
Explanation
The folder tree is displayed the left side of the screen, and the list of folders and programs is displayed the 
right side on the screen.
On the folder tree screen, current folder rank and selected folder are displayed. 
On the program list screen, programs and folder of selected folder are displayed.
Fig.12.2.4.2 (a) Program folder tree display
Procedure for displaying folder tree
1. Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. Press function key .
2. Press chapter selection soft key [FOLDER].
3. Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [TREE LIST].
5 The folder tree like the above is displayed.
6 If the press the soft key [LIST], the program list screen without folder tree is displayed.
The programs and 
folders in the 
selected folder is 
displayed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1146 -
Procedure for changing folder
In the folder tree screen, a folder is changed by moving the cursor.
Selecting upper folder: Press the cursor key .
Fig.12.2.4.2 (b)
Select under folder: Press the cursor key .
Fig.12.2.4.2 (c)
Select next or back folder: Press the cursor key or .
Fig.12.2.4.2 (d)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1147 -
12.2.5 Next Block Display Screen
Displays the block currently being executed and the block to be executed next.
Procedure for displaying the next block display screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection soft key [NEXT]. 
The G codes, addresses, command values specified in the block currently being executed and the 
next block are displayed.
Fig. 12.2.5 (a) Next block display screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1148 -
12.2.6 Program Check Screen
Displays the program currently being executed, current position of the tool, and modal data.
Procedure for displaying the program check screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection soft key [CHECK]. 
The program currently being executed, current position of the tool, and modal data are displayed.
Fig. 12.2.6 (a) Program check screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
- Program display
The program currently being executed is displayed.
The block being executed is displayed in reverse video.
- Current position display
The current position in the relative coordinate system, workpiece coordinate system, and machine 
coordinate system, and the remaining amount of travel are displayed.
- Modal G codes
Up to 24 modal G codes are displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1149 -
12.2.6.1 Modal G codes display in 3 columns on program check 
screen
Overview
Modal G codes can be displayed up to 12 codes in 3 columns on program check screen when the virtual 
MDI function is used.
Explanation
When this function is effective, modal G codes can be displayed up to 12 codes in 3 columns on program 
check screen when the virtual MDI function is used.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When this function is disabled, modal G codes can be displayed up to 8 codes in 2 columns.
To enable this function, please set following parameters.
- Modal G codes can be displayed in 3 columns (bit 5 (M3D) of parameter No.24308 is set to 1)
- Extended axis name disabled (bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No.1000 is set to 0)
- Call stack display disabled (bit 5 (CDE) of parameter No.11374 is set to 1)
- Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen is disabled (bit 5 (EPC) of parameter


key: chroma:document
string_value:
No.11356)
Virtual MDI key
Fig.12.2.6.1 (a) Modal G codes displayed in 3 columns (Virtual MDI key)
Modal G codes can be displayed 
up to 12 codes in 3 columns.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1150 -
Fig.12.2.6.1 (b) Modal G codes displayed in 2 columns (Virtual MDI key) 
Restrictions
When this function is effective, there are following restrictions.
- Axis status is not displayed
- Expanded axis name, call stack display, and display interpreted and original programs on the screen 
are not available.
12.2.6.2 Current block screen
Overview
Current block and the modal command are displayed when the virtual MDI function is used.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Current block is displayed if following parameter set to 1.
Bit 6 (CBD) of parameter No.24308
Displaying current block
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [CURRNT]. 
G code, address, command value, and modal value of the block currently being executed are 
displayed.
Modal G codes can be displayed 
up to 8 codes in 2 columns. Axis status is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1151 -
Virtual MDI
Fig.12.2.6.2 (a) Current block (Virtual MDI key) 
Explanation
Modal information displayed on current block screen differs for each system configuration.
M
Fig.12.2.6.2 (b) M


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1152 -
T
Fig.12.2.6.2 (c) T
Number of repetitive calls
When M98 is called, number of repetitive call of the subprogram is displayed.
Title and number of repetitive calls changes as follows by number of calls of command.
Table12.2.6.2 (a) Title and number of repetitive calls
Specified number of 
repetitive calls
Number of repetitive 
calls Title Display layout
0 to 99 Displayed REPEAT 1
100 to 9999 Displayed L 2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
100 to 9999 Displayed L 2
10000 to 999999 Not displayed REPEAT 3
1000000 to 99999999 Not displayed L 4
 Display layout 1 Display layout 2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1153 -
 Display layout 3 Display layout 4
 
Fig 12.2.6.2 (d) Title and number of repetitive calls
Changing of modal information
Following modal information can be displayed.
These are displayed in the same display area.
If they are multiple display setting, they are displayed according to priority.
- HD.T/NX.T
- A/C code
- 4th ,5th M code
- SRPM/SSPM/SMAX
Priority of modal information display
Priority is as follows.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Priority is as follows.
Table 12.2.6.2 (b) Priority of modal information displaying
Priority M T
1 HD.T/NX.T 4th, 5th M code
2 A/C code SRPM/SSPM/SMAX
3 4th, 5th M code －
HD.T/NX.T, T code (M)
HD.T/NX.T/T code of modal information can display according to following parameters.
Table 12.2.6.2 (c) Display layout of HD.T/NX.T/T code
DHN(No.11320#0) PCT(No.3108#2) HD.T/NX.T T code Display layout
1 1 Display Display 1 1 0 Display Display
0 1 Display Not display 2
0 0 Not display Display 3


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0 0 Not display Display 3
Display layout 1 Display layout 2 Display layout 3
 
Fig. 12.2.6.2 (e) HD.T/NX.T, T code


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1154 -
B code (M)
If second auxiliary function is enabled(parameter No.8132#2(BCD)), B code of modal information is 
displayed.
Table 12.2.6.2 (d) Display layout of A/C code
Second auxiliary function B code Display layout
Enabled Displayed 1
Disabled Not displayed 2
 Display layout 1 Display layout 2
 
Fig.12.2.6.2 (f) B code
M code (M/T)
Number of displayed M code is follows the number of M code that can be commanded within one block.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Number of M codes that can be commanded within one block depends on bit 5 (MSB) of parameter 
No.11630 and bit 7 (M3B) of parameter No.3404.
Table12.2.6.2 (e) Number of Ｍ code
M5B(No.11630#5) M3B(No.3404#7) Number of M code Display layout
1 1 5 1 1 0 5
0 1 3 2
0 0 1 3
 Display layout 1 Display layout 2 Display layout 3
 
Fig. 12.2.6.2 (g) M code


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1155 -
SRPM/SSPM/SMAX(T)
If constant surface speed control function is enabled(bit 0 (SSC) of parameter No.8133 is 1), modal 
information SRPM/SSPM/SMAX can be displayed by bit 7 (CSS) of parameter No.24314.
Table 12.2.6.2 (f) SRPM/SSPM/SMAX display
Constant surface speed 
control CSS(No.24314#7) SRPM/SSPM/SMAX Display layout
Enabled 1 Displayed 1
Enabled 0 Not Displayed
Disabled 1 Not Displayed 2
Disabled 0 Not Displayed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1156 -
Spindle command with a decimal point
If spindle command with a decimal point is effective, actual spindle speed (SACT) of modal, and S code 
are displayed with a decimal point.
Spindle command with a decimal point is enable by following conditions.
- Number having decimal points is enabled. 
- Bit 3 (SDP) of parameter No.3798) is set to 1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
S code on current block screen which independent on spindle command with a decimal point is displayed 
exactly as specified by the program command.
Fig. 12.2.6.2 (i) Spindle command with a decimal point (M)
Fig. 12.2.6.2 (j) Spindle command with a decimal point（T）


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1157 -
Next block screen
If setting of current block bit 6 (CBD) of parameter No.24308 is 1, G code on next block screen displayed 
in black letters.
There is no space between G code and address.
Fig. 12.2.6.2 (k) Next block screen (Bit 6 (CBD) of parameter No.24308 is set to 1)
Fig. 12.2.6.2 (l) Next block screen (Bit 6 (CBD) of parameter No.24308 is set to 0)
Restrictions


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1158 -
12.2.7 Background Editing
Editing one program during execution of another program is referred to as background editing. You can 
perform the same edit operations in the background as those in normal editing (foreground editing).
On a 10.4-inch or 15-inch display, you can perform background editing for the programs displayed in 
multiple tiled windows. You can switch from a program displayed in one of the tiled windows to another


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to perform copy, paste, and other edit operations, which allows you to edit programs efficiently.
You can edit one program simultaneously on a three programs on a 10.4-inch display.
Function
- Background editing
A program other than the currently selected program can be edited. Background editing can be performed 
in any mode.
- EDIT mode and reference mode
When background editing is started in the EDIT mode, the program can be edited. When background


key: chroma:document
string_value:
editing is started in the reference mode, the program is opened in the read-only mode and cannot be 
edited.
While a program opened in the EDIT mode cannot be run, a program opened in the reference mode can 
be run.
- Program selected in the foreground
If the program selected in the foreground is specified as a program to be edited in the background, 
background editing is started in the read-only mode. The text at an arbitrary position of the program 
currently being executed can be checked.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Switching from the program directory screen to the editing screen
By selecting a program from the program folder screen, background editing can be started. 
On the program folder screen, move the cursor to a program to be edited in the background, then press the 
MDI key . The screen display switches to the background editing screen.
Background editing can be started without entering a program name.
- Background editing on a multi-path system
Background editing does not depend on the path.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Even if the path to be operated is changed using the path selection signal, the background editing 
currently being executed is just continued.
NOTE
The following programs cannot be edited in the background. They can be 
opened only in the read-only mode.
- Running program
- Main program
- Program with the edit disable attribute


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1159 -
Display
When background editing starts, the ordinary program editing screen switches to the background editing 
screen.
When two or more programs are edited in the background, the screen is split to display these programs. 
For a 10.4-inch display, up to three programs can be edited at the same time.
- Word editing
Fig. 12.2.7 (a) shows background word editing performed simultaneously for two programs (right and left


key: chroma:document
string_value:
programs). On the status line at the top of the window for each program, the program name and 
“BG-EDIT” (indicating background editing in progress) are displayed.
The status line of the program being edited is displayed in reverse video.
Fig. 12.2.7 (a) Background editing screen (word editing) (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1160 -
- Character editing
Fig. 12.2.7 (b) shows background character editing performed simultaneously for two programs (right and 
left programs). Similarly to word editing, at the top of the window for each program, the status line is 
displayed. In addition, the current input mode (INSERT MODE or OVERWRITE MODE) is displayed at 
the upper right of the screen for character editing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The status line of the program being edited is displayed in reverse video.
Fig. 12.2.7 (b) Background editing screen (character editing) (10.4-inch display unit)
- Editing status
The following items are displayed on the status line and program editing area according to the 
background editing status.
Editing status Displayed items
No program selected (BG-EDIT)
“NO PROGRAM” is displayed in the editing area.
Program opened program-name + (BG-EDIT)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Read-only program opened program-name + (BG:READ ONLY)
The contents of the program are displayed in green.
Starting background editing from the editing screen
Procedure (word editing)
Method 1
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 
3 Enter a program name.
4 Press soft key [BG EDIT]. 
NOTE
1 Background editing is performed in the EDIT mode.
2 If a nonexistent program is specified, a new program is created.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1161 -
Method 2
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [BG EDIT].
4 Enter a program name.
5 Press soft key [EDIT EXEC] to start background editing in the EDIT mode or soft key [REF EXEC] 
to start background editing in the reference mode.
NOTE
If a nonexistent program is specified,
- Pressing soft key [EDIT EXEC] causes a new program to be created.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Pressing soft key [REF EXEC] causes the warning message “SPECIFIED 
PROGRAM NOT FOUND” to appear. A new program is not created.
Method 3
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [BG EDIT].
4 Press soft key [EDIT EXEC] to start background editing in the EDIT mode or soft key [REF EXEC] 
to start background editing in the reference mode. At this time, “NO PROGRAM” is displayed on 
the screen.
5 Enter a program name.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Enter a program name.
6 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH].
NOTE
If a nonexistent program is specified, the warning message “SPECIFIED 
PROGRAM NOT FOUND” is displayed. A new program is not created.
Procedure (character editing)
Method 1
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [BG EDIT].
4 Enter a program name.
5 Press soft key [EDIT EXEC] to start background editing in the EDIT mode or soft key [REF EXEC]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to start background editing in the reference mode. 
NOTE
If a nonexistent program is specified,
- Pressing soft key [EDIT EXEC] causes a new program to be created.
- Pressing soft key [REF EXEC] causes the warning message “SPECIFIED 
PROGRAM NOT FOUND” to appear. A new program is not created.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1162 -
Method 2
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM].
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [BG EDIT].
4 Press soft key [EDIT EXEC] to start background editing in the EDIT mode or soft key [REF EXEC] 
to start background editing in the reference mode. At this time, “NO PROGRAM” is displayed on 
the screen.
5 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH].
6 Enter a program name.
7 Press soft key [PROGRM NAME].
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
If a nonexistent program is specified, the warning message “SPECIFIED 
PROGRAM NOT FOUND” is displayed. A new program is not created.
When background editing has already started and editing start operation is performed again, the program 
being edited and newly specified program are edited simultaneously.
Starting background editing from the program folder screen
By selecting a program from the program folder screen, background editing can be started. The cursor is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
used to select a program. You do not need to enter a program name.
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [FOLDER]. 
3 Move the cursor to a program to be edited.
4 Press the MDI key . The screen display is switched to the background editing screen.
NOTE
When background editing is started from the program folder screen, the EDIT 
mode is set.
For the following programs, the reference mode is set, however:
- Running program
- Main program
- Program with the edit disable attribute


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1163 -
Background editing operation
- Editing operation
The same editing operations as performed in the foreground can be performed.
- Switching from a program to another for editing
To switch from a program to another for editing when editing multiple programs simultaneously in the 
background, press key, then or .
- Editing operation in the read-only mode


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Cursor movement and page switching are possible. However, program editing is disabled.
- Copying and pasting text between programs
Text in a program selected and copied during program editing is kept held after the program to be edited 
is changed. You can paste text in a program onto another program.
Background editing end operation
Background editing can be ended using the procedure described below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The procedure for ending background editing of one program and that for ending all background editing 
of multiple programs are shown below.
- Ending editing of one program
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 
3 Select a program for which to end editing.
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [BG END].
- Ending editing of all programs
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [BG ALL END].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To return to ordinary foreground editing, end all background editing. If at least one program is being 
edited in the background, you cannot return to foreground editing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1164 -
12.2.8 Stamping the Machining Time
The execution times of the most recently executed ten programs can be displayed in hours, minutes, and 
seconds.
The calculated machining time can be inserted as a comment of the program to check the machining time 
on the program folder screen.
Procedure for stamping the machining time
Procedure
- Displaying the machining time
1 Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display soft key [TIME].
3 Press soft key [TIME]. The machining time display screen appears.
Fig. 12.2.8 (a) Machining time display screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1165 -
- Calculating the machining time
1 Select the memory operation mode, then press the key.
2 Select the program screen, then select a program of which machining time you want to calculate.
3 Execute the program to perform actual machining.
4 When the key is pressed or, M02 or M30 is executed, the machining time count operation 
stops. When the machining time display screen is selected, the program number of the stopped main


key: chroma:document
string_value:
program and its machining time are displayed.
5 The Fig. 12.2.8 (b) shows the screen when the machining times of the ten main programs O0020, 
O0040, …, and O0200 are displayed and the screen when the machining time of O0220 is newly 
calculated after that.
Fig. 12.2.8 (b) Stamping the machining time (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1166 -
Procedure for inserting the machining time on the program screen
Procedure
You can display the machining time of a program as a comment of the program. The procedure is shown 
below:
1 To insert the calculated machining time of a program as a comment, the machining time of the 
program must be displayed on the machining time display screen. Before stamping the machining


key: chroma:document
string_value:
time of the program, check that the program number is displayed on the machining time display 
screen.
2 Set the edit mode or background editing state and select the program screen. Then, select a program 
of which machining time you want to insert.
3 Suppose that the machining time of O0100 is displayed on the machining time display screen. 
Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display the operation soft keys. Then, press the continuous menu key


key: chroma:document
string_value:
several times to display soft key [INSERT TIME]. Press soft key [INSERT TIME]. The 
beginning of the program is displayed and the machining time of the program is inserted after the 
program name.
Press soft key [INSERT TIME].
Fig. 12.2.8 (c) Program screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1167 -
4 If a comment is written in the block containing the program number of a program of which 
machining time is to be inserted, the machining time is inserted after the comment.
Press soft key [INSERT TIME].
Fig. 12.2.8 (d) Program screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1168 -
Display on the program folder screen
The machining time of a program inserted in the program as a comment is displayed after the existing 
comment of the program on the program folder screen.
Fig. 12.2.8 (e) Program folder screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Machining time
The machining time is counted from the initial start after a reset in the memory operation mode to the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
next reset. If a reset is not performed during operation, the machining time is counted from the start to 
M02 or M30. The time during which operation is held is not counted, but the time used to wait for the 
completion of the M, S, T, and/or B functions is counted, however.
- Stamping the machining time
You can insert (stamp) the displayed machining time in a program stored in memory as a comment. The 
machining time is inserted as a comment after the program number.
- Program folder


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Program folder
You can display the machining time inserted after a program number on the program folder screen. This 
operation lets you know the machining time of each program to use the time as useful reference data 
when planning processes on site.
Limitation
- Alarm
The execution of a program may be held by an alarm during the machining time count operation. In this 
case, the machining time is counted until the alarm is released by a reset.
- M02


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- M02
It may be specified that M02 does not reset the CNC, but returns completion signal FIN to the CNC to 
restart the program from the beginning successively (bit 5 (M02) of parameter No. 3404 is set to 0). In 
this case, when M02 returns completion signal FIN, the machining time count operation stops.
- Stamping the machining time
When an attempt is made to stamp the machining time of a program in the program, the machining time


key: chroma:document
string_value:
of the program may not be displayed on the machining time display screen. In this case, the machining 
time cannot be inserted in the program even if soft key [INSERT TIME] is pressed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1169 -
- Correcting the machining time
If an incorrect machining time is calculated (such as when a reset is made during the execution of a 
program), reexecute the program to calculate the correct machining time. The same program number may 
be displayed in two or more lines on the machining time display screen. In this case, the latest calculated 
machining time is inserted in the program.
- States of the stamped machining time


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the following states, the stamped machining time is displayed on the program folder screen as shown 
below.
1 When the comment of a program is longer than 16 characters
The 17th and subsequent characters of the comment are discarded and the machining time display 
field is left blank.
Fig. 12.2.8 (f) When the comment of a program is longer than 16 characters (10.4-inch display unit)
2 When two or more machining times are stamped
The first machining time is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1170 -
Fig. 12.2.8 (g) When two or more machining times are stamped (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1171 -
3 When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS” (H following a 3-digit 
number, M following a 2-digit number, and S following a 2-digit number, in this order)
The machining time display field is left blank.
Fig. 12.2.8 (h) When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS” (H following a 3-digit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
number, M following a 2-digit number, and S following a 2-digit number, in this order) (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1172 -
12.2.9 Screen for Assistance in Entering Tilted Working Plane
Indexing
The screens for assistance in entering tilted working plane indexing (hereinafter referred to as guidance 
screens) include a command type selection screen and a tilted working plane data setting screen. The 
command type selection screen is used to select a tilted working plane indexing. The tilted working plane


key: chroma:document
string_value:
data setting screen is used to set specified tilted working plane data required for the selected command.
By making settings and performing operations on these guidance screens, a tilted working plane indexing
block can be created.
The created block is reflected as a new insertion to a program being edited or as a modification to an 
existing block.
This function can be enabled by setting bit 1 (GGD) of parameter No. 11304 to 1.
Creation of a new block


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Creation of a new block
The following describes the procedure for creating a tilted working plane indexing block on guidance 
screens and for inserting the block to a program being edited on a program editing screen.
1 On a program editing screen, display a program to which you want to insert a tilted working plane 
indexing block.
The foreground editing screen, background editing screen, or MDI editing screen should be 
displayed.
- Displaying the foreground editing screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<1> Select the EDIT mode.
<2> Press function key .
<3> Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 
- Displaying the background editing screen
<1> Press function key .
<2> Press soft key [FOLDER]. 
<3> Press any of the cursor keys to move the cursor to a program to be edited in the 
background.
<4> Press key.
- Displaying the MDI editing screen
<1> Select the MDI mode.
<2> Press function key .
<3> Press soft key [PROGRAM].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1173 -
The program editing screen is displayed.
Fig.12.2.9 (a) 
2 Press any of the cursor keys to move the cursor to a position where you want to insert a block.
Note that a block created on the guidance screens is inserted after the block at the cursor position. (If 
the block at the cursor position includes a tilted working plane indexing, the existing block is 
modified. See "Modification to an existing block" below.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press continuous menu key several times, and then press soft key [GUIDANCE].
The command type selection screen is displayed.
Fig.12.2.9 (b)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1174 -
5 Select a command type with any of the cursor keys, and then press soft key [SELECT].
The tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed.
Fig.12.2.9 (c)
6 Enter command data for the setting items.
7 Press soft key [INSERT]. 
Fig.12.2.9 (d)
8 Press soft key [YES]. 
This takes you back to the program editing screen, where the new block is inserted after the block at 
the cursor position.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1175 -
Modification to an existing block
The following describes the procedure for replacing a block in a program being edited on a program 
editing screen, with a tilted working plane indexing block created on a guidance screen.
1 On a program editing screen, display a program to be edited.
(For the procedure for displaying a program editing screen, see step 1 in "Creation of a new block".)
The program editing screen is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig.12.2.9 (e)
2 Press any of the cursor keys to move the cursor to a block to be modified.
For a command extending over more than one block, move the cursor to the first block.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press continuous menu key several times, and then press soft key [GUIDANCE TWP]. The 
tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed.
Fig.12.2.9 (f)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1176 -
5 Enter command data for setting items to be modified.
6 Press soft key [ALTER].
Fig.12.2.9 (g) 
7 Press soft key [YES]. 
This takes you back to the program editing screen, where the block at the cursor position is replaced.
Guidance screen cancellation
Pressing soft key [CANCEL] on a guidance screen takes you back to the program editing screen. At this 
time, the data that has been set on the guidance screen is discarded.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
1 In addition to the above operation, the following operations also cancel a 
guidance screen. The data that has been set on the guidance screen is 
discarded.
- When bit 7 (CPG) of parameter No. 11302 is 1 (setting for automatically 
switching between program-related screens according to CNC mode), the 
CNC mode is changed.
- When a guidance screen is displayed from the foreground editing screen, the 
CNC mode is changed to a mode other than EDIT, TJOG, or THND.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- When a guidance screen is displayed from the MDI editing screen, the CNC 
mode is changed to a mode other than MDI.
- When a guidance screen is displayed on a 15/19-inch display unit, the screen 
is switched by a vertical soft key.
- The screen is switched by an MDI key.
- The screen is switched by a path select signal.
- An event that causes screen switching has occurred, including occurrence of 
an alarm, display of an operator message, or signal-based display of a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen (such as a tool compensation screen, workpiece shift screen, 
workpiece coordinate system setting screen, or C Language Executor 
screen).
2 If MDI key is pressed after switching from a guidance screen to another 
screen, a program editing screen is displayed, instead of the guidance screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1177 -
Notes
- Conditions under which soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is displayed
Soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is displayed on a program editing screen under the following 
conditions:
1 Foreground editing screen
- The CNC mode is EDIT, TJOG, or THND.
- The editing and display are not prohibited for a program to be edited.
2 Background editing screen
- A program to be edited is not in reference mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- The editing and display are not prohibited for a program to be edited.
3 MDI editing screen
- The CNC mode is MDI.
- Screen displayed when soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is pressed
When soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is pressed, which guidance screen is displayed is automatically
determined according to the conditions described below.
1 When a tilted working plane indexing is not included in a block at the cursor position on a 
program editing screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
program editing screen
The command type selection screen is displayed. A block created on the guidance screens 
is inserted after the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen.
2 When a tilted working plane indexing is included in a block at the cursor position on a program 
editing screen
The tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed, which shows the data for the 
tilted working plane indexing in the block at the cursor position on the program editing
screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen. 
When a block of a tool axis direction control command exists immediately after the tilted 
working plane indexing, the command data for the block is also shown. The tilted working 
plane indexing in the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen is replaced 
with a block created on the guidance screen.
NOTE
If the CNC is in the reset state or emergency stop state when soft key
[GUIDANCE TWP] is pressed on the foreground editing screen or MDI editing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen, the warning "PROGRAM READ FAILED" appears, and the operation
cannot be continued. (Soft keys other than [CANCEL] are not displayed.) Press 
soft key [CANCEL] to return to the program editing screen, and then press soft 
key [GUIDANCE TWP] again.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1178 -
12.2.9.1 Command type selection screen
The command type selection screen is used to select the type of a tilted working plane indexing you want 
to insert into a program to be edited. One of the following command types can be selected:
- G68.2 / G68.4 (Euler’s angle)
- G68.2 / G68.4 P1 (Roll-Pitch-Yaw angle)
- G68.2 / G68.4 P2 (3 points specification)
- G68.2 / G68.4 P3 (2 vectors specification)
- G68.2 / G68.4 P4 (Projection angle)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- G68.3 (Tool Axis Direction)
G68.2 is an absolute command, and G68.4 is an incremental command.
Fig. 12.2.9.1 (a) Command type selection screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Selection of a command type
1 Press cursor key or to move the cursor to a command type you want to select. As the 
cursor is moved, the figure corresponding to the command type at the cursor position is displayed.
2 When soft key [SELECT] is pressed, the command type at the cursor position is accepted, and the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed.
NOTE
If the warning "PROGRAM READ FAILED" appears when the command type 
selection screen is displayed, the operation cannot be continued. (Soft keys 
other than [CANCEL] are not displayed.) Press soft key [CANCEL] to return to 
the program editing screen, and then press soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] again.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1179 -
12.2.9.2 Tilted working plane data setting screen
The tilted working plane data setting screen is used to set specified tilted working plane data required for 
a tilted working plane indexing of the type that has been selected on the command type selection screen 
or has been selected when soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is pressed.
Different types of tilted working plane data setting screen are provided for different command types. For


key: chroma:document
string_value:
details of each type of tilted working plane data setting screen, see "Details of the tilted working plane 
data setting screen".
Fig. 12.2.9.2 (a) Tilted working plane data setting screen-3 points specification(10.4-inch display unit)
Display of the tilted working plane data setting screen
When a new block is created, the initial values are set in the setting and selection items.
When an existing block is modified, the command data for the block at the cursor position on the program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
editing screen is reflected in the setting and selection items.
NOTE
1 For existing block modification, if the guidance screen is displayed when the 
cursor is placed in the middle of multiple blocks for a command, the parameters 
for the block(s) before the cursor are not reflected in the setting and selection 
items, but only the parameters for the block(s) after the cursor are reflected. If no 
data is to be reflected in a setting or selection item, the initial value is set in the 
item.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
item.
2 For existing block modification, only the commands with parameter-specified 
axis names are reflected in the setting items on the screen. (The values 
specified in data for commands with incorrect axis names are not reflected in the 
setting items.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1180 -
Command data input
- Item for which to enter a value
Press cursor key or to move the cursor to an item you want to set.
Enter a value, and then press the key or soft key [INPUT].
Example)
When the origin of a feature coordinate system is set as shown above, addresses X, Y, and Z 
are specified as follows:
G68.2 X0.001 Y0.01 Z1000 ...
For two items "Tool Offset Number" and "From TCP to center", the state with no command can be


key: chroma:document
string_value:
set by deleting the specified values according to the following procedure.
1 Press cursor key or to move the cursor to the item "Tool Offset Number" or 
"From TCP to Center".
2 Press or soft key [INPUT] without entering anything.
- Item to be selected from a list
1 Press cursor key or to move the cursor to an item you want to set.
2 Press cursor key or to move the cursor to an item you want to select.
Example)
Order of rotation for Roll-Pitch Yaw angle
Insertion of a block


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Insertion of a block
If the guidance screen is displayed when the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen 
does not include a tilted working plane indexing, soft key [INSERT] is displayed on the tilted working 
plane data setting screen. An operation for inserting a tilted working plane indexing block is described 
below.
For warnings that may be issued at the time of block insertion, see "Limitation".
1 Press soft key [INSERT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press soft key [INSERT]. 
The confirmation message "ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO EXECUTE?" is displayed, and soft 
keys [YES] and [NO] are displayed.
2 Press soft key [YES]. 
A block is created from the command type and command data and then is inserted after the block at 
the cursor position in the program to be edited. After block insertion, the guidance screen is closed 
and the program editing screen is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1181 -
Example)
G00 X0.; When the guidance screen is displayed and the 3-point specification is selected as a 
command type for block insertion, a created block is inserted after the block at the cursor 
position.
G00 X0.;
G68.2 P2 Q0...
G68.2 P2 Q1...
G68.2 P2 Q2...
G68.2 P2 Q3...
Replacement of a block
If the guidance screen is displayed when the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
includes a tilted working plane indexing, soft key [ALTER] is displayed on the tilted working plane data 
setting screen. An operation for replacing a tilted working plane indexing block is described below.
For warnings that may be issued at the time of block replacement, see "Limitation".
1 Press soft key [ALTER]. 
The confirmation message "ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO EXECUTE?" is displayed, and soft 
keys [YES] and [NO] are displayed.
2 Press soft key [YES].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press soft key [YES]. 
A block is created from the command type and command data and then replaces the tilted working 
plane indexing in the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen. After block 
replacement, the guidance screen is closed and the program editing screen is displayed.
Pressing soft key [NO] takes you back to the tilted working plane data setting screen.
NOTE
1 If a block to be replaced includes a command other than a tilted working plane


key: chroma:document
string_value:
indexing, the command is deleted during block replacement. However, only the 
sequence number at the beginning is preserved.
2 If the guidance screen is displayed when the cursor is placed in the middle of 
multiple blocks for a command, the block(s) before the cursor are not replaced. 
These blocks remain unchanged after replacement.
3 If soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is pressed when the cursor is placed on a block of 
a tool axis direction control command, the command type selection screen is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed in new insertion mode. A block created on the guidance screens is 
inserted after the block of the tool axis direction control command.
Limitation
The following lists the warnings that may be issued at the time of block insertion or replacement.
If a warning is displayed, return to the program editing screen with soft key [CANCEL] and press soft 
key [GUIDANCE TWP] again, or eliminate the cause of the warning and retry the operation.
Warning Description
“PROGRAM WRITE 
FAILED”


key: chroma:document
string_value:
“PROGRAM WRITE 
FAILED”
- The guidance screen was displayed from the foreground editing screen or MDI 
editing screen, and a block insertion or replacement operation was performed 
when the CNC was in the reset state or emergency stop state.
“PROGRAM CANNOT BE 
WRITTEN”
- A block insertion or replacement operation was performed after a program to be 
edited was updated due to program downloading by an external application 
while the guidance screen was displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- A block insertion or replacement operation was performed after the start of the 
main program was located by a reset while the guidance screen was displayed. 
↓


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1182 -
Warning Description
“WRITE PROTECT” - A block insertion or replacement operation was performed when the editing or 
display was prohibited for a program to be edited.
- A block insertion or replacement operation was performed when the memory 
protection signal (KEY signal) for program registration or editing was off.
- A block insertion or replacement operation was performed when the operation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
level of the 8-level data protection function was lower than the protection level of 
a part program editing operation.
Display of the command type selection screen
When soft key [COMMAND TYPE] is pressed, the command type selection screen is displayed. When 
the command type is changed on the command type selection screen, the values set on the tilted working 
plane data setting screen are cleared.
When a tilted working plane indexing is included in the block at the cursor position on the program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
editing screen, you can display the guidance screen, change the command type on the command type 
selection screen, and then perform block replacement. In this case, the block at the cursor position on the 
program editing screen is replaced with a block created from the command type and command data that 
have been set.
12.2.9.3 Details of the tilted working plane data setting screen
The following six tilted working plane indexing are supported.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
For details of the commands, see Section, "TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING".
- G68.2 / G68.4 (Euler’s angle)
- G68.2 / G68.4 P1 (Roll-Pitch-Yaw angle)
- G68.2 / G68.4 P2 (3 points specification)
- G68.2 / G68.4 P3 (2 vectors specification)
- G68.2 / G68.4 P4 (Projection angle)
- G68.3 (Tool Axis Direction)
G68.2 is an absolute command, and G68.4 is an incremental command.
G68.2 / G68.4(Euler’s angle)
Fig. 12.2.9.3 (a) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Euler’s angle(10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1183 -
- Multi Type
Absolute:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of 
whether tilted working plane indexing mode is set.
Incremental:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a feature coordinate system if tilted working 
plane indexing mode is already set.
- Origin of Feature Coordinate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Origin of Feature Coordinate
Specify the origin (X, Y, and Z of point P) of a feature coordinate system as coordinates in a 
workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type).
- Euler’s angle
I : Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the 
absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This rotation determines coordinate system 1 (X1-Y1-Z1) from the workpiece coordinate 
system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental
type) (X-Y-Z).
J : Specify an angle of rotation around the X-axis of coordinate system 1.
This rotation determines coordinate system 2 (X2-Y2-Z2) from coordinate system 1 
(X1-Y1-Z1).
K : Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of coordinate system 2.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
After this rotation, a feature coordinate system is obtained by shifting the origin of the 
workpiece coordinate system by the coordinates specified in "Origin of Feature Coordinate".
G68.2 / G68.4(Roll-Pitch-Yaw angle)
Fig. 12.2.9.3 (b) Tilted working plane data setting screen- Roll-Pitch-Yaw angle(10.4-inch display unit)
- Multi Type
Absolute:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of 
whether tilted working plane indexing mode is set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Incremental:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a feature coordinate system if tilted working 
plane indexing mode is already set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1184 -
- Order of Rotation
Select an order in which the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis are rotated in a workpiece coordinate system 
(for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type). The 
selectable rotation orders are as follows:
1st rotation axis 2nd rotation axis 3rd rotation axis
X→Y→Z X-axis Y-axis Z-axis
X→Z→Y X-axis Z-axis Y-axis
Y→X→Z Y-axis X-axis Z-axis
Y→Z→X Y-axis Z-axis X-axis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Y→Z→X Y-axis Z-axis X-axis
Z→X→Y Z-axis X-axis Y-axis
Z→Y→X Z-axis Y-axis X-axis
- Origin of Feature Coordinate
Specify the origin (X, Y, and Z of point P) of a feature coordinate system as coordinates in a 
workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type).
- Rotation Angle about X-axis
Specify an angle of rotation around the X-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute


key: chroma:document
string_value:
type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type).
- Rotation Angle about Y-axis
Specify an angle of rotation around the Y-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute 
type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type).
- Rotation Angle about Z-axis
Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute 
type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1185 -
Fig. 12.2.9.3 (c) Tilted working plane data setting screen- 3 points specification(10.4-inch display unit)
- Multi Type
Absolute:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of 
whether tilted working plane indexing mode is set.
Incremental:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a feature coordinate system if tilted working 
plane indexing mode is already set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Shift of the Origin
Specify, in a feature coordinate system, an amount of shift from the feature coordinate system origin 
specified for the 1st point (point P1).
- Rotation Angle about the Z-axis in F-Coordinate
Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a feature coordinate system. The direction of 
rotation angle R is positive when a rotation is made clockwise as viewed in the Z-axis direction of 
the feature coordinate system.
- 1st point (Origin of Feature Coordinate)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Specify the origin (X, Y, and Z of point P1) of a feature coordinate system as coordinates in a 
workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type).
- 2nd point
Specify the coordinates (X, Y, and Z of point P2) of the 2nd point as coordinates in a workpiece
coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
incremental type). The 1st point and 2nd point determine the X-axis of the feature coordinate 
system.
- 3rd point
Specify the coordinates (X, Y, and Z of point P3) of the 3rd point as coordinates in a workpiece
coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type). Among the directions normal to the X-axis, a direction with a smaller angle 
relative to the P1 → P3 vector is the Y-axis of the feature coordinate system.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1186 -
G68.2 / G68.4(2 vectors specification)
Fig. 12.2.9.3 (d) Tilted working plane data setting screen-2 vectors specification(10.4-inch display unit)
- Multi Type
Absolute:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of 
whether tilted working plane indexing mode is set.
Incremental:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a feature coordinate system if tilted working


key: chroma:document
string_value:
plane indexing mode is already set.
- Origin of Feature Coordinate
Specify the origin (X, Y, and Z of point P) of a feature coordinate system as coordinates in a 
workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type).
- V1 (X’) vector
Specify the X-axis direction vector of a feature coordinate system as values in a workpiece 
coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
incremental type).
- V2 (Z’) vector
Specify the Z-axis direction vector of a feature coordinate system as values in a workpiece 
coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1187 -
G68.2 / G68.4(Projection angle)
Fig. 12.2.9.3 (e) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Projection angle(10.4-inch display unit)
 
- Multi Type
Absolute:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of 
whether tilted working plane indexing mode is set.
Incremental:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a feature coordinate system if tilted working


key: chroma:document
string_value:
plane indexing mode is already set.
- Origin of Feature Coordinate
Specify the origin (X, Y, and Z of point P) of a feature coordinate system as coordinates in a 
workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type).
- Projection angle
I : Specify a projection angle relative to the X-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the 
absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
J : Specify a projection angle relative to the Y-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the 
absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type).
K : Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a feature coordinate system.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1188 -
G68.3(Tool Axis Direction)
Fig. 12.2.9.3 (f) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Tool Axis Direction(10.4-inch display unit)
(When "No" is selected in "Origin command of Feature Coordinate")
Fig. 12.2.9.3 (g) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Tool Axis Direction(10.4-inch display unit)
(When "Yes" is selected in "Origin command of Feature Coordinate")
- Origin command of Feature Coordinate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Select whether to specify a feature coordinate system origin.
Yes : A feature coordinate system origin is specified.
No : A feature coordinate system origin is not specified.
- Origin of Feature Coordinate
Specify the origin (X, Y, and Z of point P) of a feature coordinate system as coordinates in a 
workpiece coordinate system.
This setting cannot be made if "No" is selected in "Origin command of Feature Coordinate".
- Rotation Angle about the Z-axis in F-Coordinate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a feature coordinate system. The direction of 
rotation angle R is positive when a rotation is made clockwise as viewed in the Z-axis direction of 
the feature coordinate system.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1189 -
12.2.9.4 Tilted Working Plane Indexing during manual operation
On the guidance screen, tilted working plane indexing in current executed path is executable and 
cancellable.
How to execute tilted working plane indexing
1 Input definition of tilted working plane on the guidance screen.
Fig. 12.2.9.4 (a) Guidance screen
2 Press soft key [INDEXING ON].
Fig. 12.2.9.4 (b) Soft key [INDEXING ON]
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
If the case of incremental (G68.4), value set to guidance screen is cleared when 
soft key [INDEXING ON] is pressed.
How to cancel tilted working plane indexing
1 Press soft key [INDEXING OFF] on the guidance screen.
Fig. 12.2.9.4 (c) Soft key [INDEXING OFF]
NOTE
If soft key is pressed in the following conditions, warning occurs.
- Not during cancelling tool length compensation
- Neither in MDI, JOG nor HND mode
Input 
definition


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1190 -
12.2.9.5 Limitation
This function is supported on 10.4-inch, 15-inch, and 19-inch display units.
Screens of a 15/19-inch display unit
This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function key . The screens include a 
program editing screen, program folder list display screen, and screens for displaying the command states 
of the program currently being executed.
1. Program screen
2. Program folder screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. Program folder screen
3. Next block display screen
4. Program check screen
On the program screen, you edit the program that is currently selected, and display the block that is 
currently executed during program operation. In MDI mode, you also edit an MDI operation program, 
and display the block that is currently executed.
12.2.10 Program Contents Display (15/19-inch Display Unit)
Displays the program currently being executed in MEM mode.
Displaying the program being executed
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure
1 Press function key to display the program screen.
2 Press vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 
The cursor is positioned at the block currently being executed.
Fig. 12.2.10 (a) Screen for displaying the program being executed (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1191 -
12.2.10.1 Displaying the executed block (BC)
For an explanation of how to display the executed block, see Subsection, "Displaying the executed 
block".
12.2.10.2 Call stack display (15/19-inch display unit)
Overview
In the call stack display, the program name and nest level of subprogram from main program to current 
executing subprogram is displayed. When the device to which program is stored is a CNC build-in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
memory, the program comment is displayed in addition to a program name and a nest level. Moreover, 
the folder name where the program is stored is displayed in the active program now.
Call stack display 
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the vertical soft key [CHECK].
Fig.12.2.10.2 (a) Program check screen (15-inch) (Non call stack display)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1192 -
3 Press the horizontal soft key [CALL STK ON].
The call stack is displayed on the program check screen.
And the display of the horizontal soft key changes into [CALL STKOFF].
Fig.12.2.10.2 (b) Program check screen (15-inch) (Call stack display) 
4 The screen returns to Fig.12.2.10.2(a) by pressing the horizontal soft key [CALL STKOFF].
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
In the call stack, nest level and program name and program comment of subprogram from main program 
to program being executed is displayed. Moreover, about the program being executed, in addition to 
program name and program comment, the folder information is displayed.
The following items are displayed on the screen.
Table12.2.10.2 Item of call stack display 
Content of display Explanation
NEST LEVEL Level of subprogram calling from main program to program being executed is displayed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
by the number. 
The main program is displayed in the line of nest level 01.
PROGRAM NAME The name of subprogram called from the main program is displayed.
And when all calling program cannot be displayed within the area, it is displayed from the 
one with large number of nest level.
Moreover, the folder where the program is stored is displayed for the active program.
The head of the folder is a device name.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PROGRAM COMMENT In case of CNC build-in memory, Program comment is displayed in parentheses at the 
right of program name.
Call stack display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1193 -
Example of screen
When the block of the cursor position is executed by the subprogram call from the main program that 
exists in the figure below,
<MAIN_PROG>(MAIN PROGRAM)
⋅
⋅
M98 <SUB_PROG_1>
⋅
⋅
M30
<SUB_PROG_1>(SUB1 PROGRAM)
⋅
⋅
M98 <SUB_PROG_2>
⋅
⋅
M99
<SUB_PROG_2>(SUB2 PROGRAM)
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
M99
Fig.12.2.10.2 (c) Example of subprogram call 
The call stack is displayed as shown in the figure below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig.12.2.10.2 (d) Call stack display
NOTE
1 When the storing number of program name and program comment and the folder 
information exceed display area, the exceed part is displayed by the “…”.
2 As for MDI program, the program name is displayed as O0000 in the call stack.
3 As for External program, the folder where the program is stored is not displayed
and the top of program path name is displayed as “//DNC” in the call stack.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 The programs of external subprogram call (M198) and execution macro are not 
displayed in the call stack.
5 In the multi-path system simultaneous display, the call stack display can not be 
performed on the same screen. However, if single-path display mode is set (bit 3 
(MTS) of parameter No.11355#3 is 1), the call stack can be displayed.
NEST LEVEL PROGRAM NAME PROGRAM COMMENT
G01 X100. Z50. ;


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1194 -
12.2.10.3 Display interpreted and original programs on the same 
screen (15/19-inch display unit)
Overview
The input custom macro programs before conversion (original) and after conversion (interpreted) are
displayed on the program check screen at the same time.
If bit 5 (EPC) of parameter No.11356 is set to 1, this function becomes effective.
Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the vertical soft key [CHECK].
Fig.12.2.10.3 (a) Program check screen (15-inch) 
(Non display interpreted and original programs on the same screen)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1195 -
3 Press the horizontal soft key [INTERPRETED].
The original program display is switched to the simultaneous display of interpreted program and 
original program. And the horizontal soft key [INTERPRETED] is changed to [ORIGINAL].
Fig.12.2.10.3 (b) Program check screen (15-inch) 
(Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen)
4 The screen returns to Fig.12.2.10.3(a) by pressing the horizontal soft key [ORIGINAL].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
- For interpreted program
The program after the custom macro program is calculated is displayed.
Both the block being executed now and the block executed next to the executing block are displayed.
When the block executed next is a call command of the subprogram such as M98, called program is 
displayed.
- For original program
The program before the custom macro program is calculated is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The blocks displayed before and after the active block are displayed in the order of registration in the 
memory.
The block is not necessarily a block executed last time, or, the block is not necessarily a block that will be 
executed next time either.
The difference point of the original program and the interpreted program is as follows.
Table12.2.10.3 The difference point of the original program and the interpreted program 
Comment Macro program Macro Variable Decimal Point Subprogram call


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Interpreted
Program
Not displayed Not displayed Value stored in 
macro variable
Least increment 
system
Not displayed
(Example) G01 (Not displayed) G01 X123.456 ; G01 X1.000 ; (Not displayed)
Original
Program
Displayed Displayed Macro variable The decimal point 
position is the 
same as the 
input.
Displayed
(Example) G01 
(COMMENT)
IF [#1 GT 10]
GOTO 20
G01 X#100 ; G01 X1. ; M98P1000;


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1196 -
Example of screen
Fig.12.2.10.3 (c) Display interpreted and original programs on the same screen 
NOTE
1 In case of the program stored in internal memory (CNC MEM) and the program 
in memory card program device (MEMCARD), the interpreted and original 
programs are displayed on the same screen.
2 Protected programs and execution macro programs are not displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 The interpreted program is displayed in the area of the original program display
during DNC operation.
4 In operating of single block, the cursor shows the executed block. The cursor 
doesn’t move to the next block.
5 In the multi-path system simultaneous display, the display interpreted and 
original programs can not be performed on the same screen.
Restrictions
This function cannot be used at the same time with the following functions.
- Manual Handle Retrace
- Retrace


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Retrace
12.2.11 Editing a Program (15/19-inch Display Unit)
A program can be edited in the EDIT mode.
Two modes of editing are available. One mode is word editing, which performs word-by-word editing. 
The other is character editing, which performs character-by-character editing.
For program creation and editing operation, see Chapter, “CREATING PROGRAMS “ and Chapter , 
“EDITING PROGRAMS”.
Interpreted program
Original program
Executing block
Executing block
Next executing block
Next block


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1197 -
Displaying the program editing screen
Procedure
1 Press function key to display the program screen.
2 Press vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 
- Word editing
Editing operations such as text insertion, modification, and deletion, and cursor movements are performed 
on a word-by-word basis.
Fig. 12.2.11 (a) Program word editing screen (15-inch display unit)
- Character editing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Character editing
Program editing operations and cursor movements are performed on a character-by-character basis as 
with a general text editor.
Text is input directly to the cursor position instead of using the key input buffer.
Fig. 12.2.11 (b) Program character editing screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1198 -
Switching between program editing modes
You can switch between word editing and character editing with horizontal soft keys.
Procedure
1 Press function key to display the program screen.
2 Press vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 
3 Press continuous menu key to display horizontal soft key [CHANGE EDITOR].
4 Pressing horizontal soft key [CHANGE EDITOR] switches the editing mode between word editing 
and character editing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and character editing.
12.2.12 Program Screen for MDI Operation (15/19-inch Display Unit)
During MDI operation or editing of an MDI operation program in the MDI mode, the program currently 
being executed mode is displayed.
For MDI operation, see Section, “MDI Operation”.
Procedure for displaying the program screen for MDI operation
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 
The program input from the MDI is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1199 -
12.2.13 Program Folder Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)
A list of programs registered in the program memory is displayed.
For the program folder screen, see Chapter, “PROGRAM MANAGEMENT”.
Displaying the program folder screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [FOLDER]. 
Fig. 12.2.13 (a) Program folder screen (15-inch display unit)
Displaying comments on the program folder screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The comments of the first block of the program are displayed by setting bit 1 (COL) of parameter No. 
11351 to 1.
Fig.12.2.13 (b) Displaying comments on the program folder screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1200 -
12.2.13.1 Split display on the program folder screen
Overview
On the program folder screen, the folder information display can be split into two folder information 
views, upper and lower, as shown in the Fig. 12.2.13.1 (a). 
Fig. 12.2.13.1 (a) Program folder screen (split-display screen)(15-inch display unit)
On the split folder display, file information about different sets of devices or folders can be shown in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
different views at the same time, so you can copy or move files easily.
Example of copying a file from the CNC_MEM to the Data Server
(3) (4)
(2)
(1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1201 -
Procedure
<1> Change to a destination folder on the Data Server.
<2> Change to a folder on the CNC_MEM that contains a file you want to copy.
<3> Select the file.
<4> Copy the file.
Procedure for switching to split display
Procedure
1 Press function key to display the program folder screen.
2 Press horizontal soft key [(OPRT)]. 
3 Press continuous menu key twice.
Horizontal soft key [MULTI LIST] appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1202 -
4 Press horizontal soft key [MULTI LIST]. 
The folder information display is split into two folder views, upper and lower, which show the same 
folder information. Immediately after the splitting, the upper folder view becomes active for 
operations. At the same time, horizontal soft key [SINGLE LIST] appears.
Fig. 12.2.13.1 (c) Program folder screen (split-display screen)(15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Pressing horizontal soft key [SINGLE LIST] takes you back to the original program folder display. 
Then, the folders are shown which have been selected in the active view for operations on the split 
display.
Procedure for switching between active folder views for file operations on the split 
display
On the split folder display, you can switch between active folder views for file operations as described 
below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
below.
In the active folder view for file operations, the cursor is displayed on the file list.
Procedure
1 When the upper folder view is active for file operations and you press MDI key and cursor 
key , the lower folder view becomes active for file operations.
2 When the lower folder view is active for file operations and you press MDI key and cursor 
key , the upper folder view becomes active for file operations.
NOTE
1 In step 1, even if you press MDI key and cursor key when the upper


key: chroma:document
string_value:
folder view is active for file operations, the lower folder view becomes active for 
file operations.
2 In step 2, even if you press MDI key and cursor key when the lower 
folder view is active for file operations, the upper folder view becomes active for 
file operations.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1203 -
Explanation
- File operations on the split display
The following operations are allowed on the split display.
<1> You can select and display devices or folders individually in each folder view.
<2> You can copy or move files between folders selected in different folder views.
(For details, see the section on operations of copying/moving between devices.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the selected folder view, you can perform the same operations as on the normal screen.
- Path switching
When path switching is performed while the split display is provided for a multi-path system, the folder 
view in which the CNC MEM is selected as a device is changed to a view of the last selected folder for 
each path on the CNC MEM.
- Device information display
The device information as shown in the normal program folder screen (portion in a dotted box in the Fig.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12.2.13.1 (d)) is not shown on the split display (Fig. 12.2.13.1 (c)).
Fig. 12.2.13.1 (d) Program folder screen (normal screen)(15-inch display unit)
You should see the device information on the normal screen.
Limitation
- Device that can be selected in both views at the same time on the split display
The same device of any of the following types can be selected in both views at the same time on the split 
display.
• CNC MEM
• MEM CARD(binary format)
• Data Server


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Data Server
For other types, the same device cannot be selected for display in the folder views at the same time.
If any other type of device is selected when split display starts, the upper and lower folder views cannot 
show the same sets of folders due to the above limitation. Therefore, the lower folder view shows the 
folder selected as a foreground folder.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1204 -
- Display units that support the split display
The split display is supported on 10.4-inch, 15-inch, and 19-inch display units.
12.2.13.2 Folder tree display (15/19-inch display unit)
This is same as the 10.4-inch display units. Refer to Subsection, “Folder tree display”.
12.2.14 Next Block Display Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)
Displays the block currently being executed and the block to be executed next.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure for displaying the next block display screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT]. 
The G codes, addresses, command values specified in the block currently being executed and the 
next block are displayed.
Fig. 12.2.14 (a) Next block display screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1205 -
12.2.15 Program Check Screen (15/19-inch Display Unit)
Displays the program currently being executed, current position of the tool, and modal data.
Procedure for displaying the program check screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [CHECK]. 
The program currently being executed, current position of the tool, and modal data are displayed.
Fig. 12.2.15 (a) Program check screen (15-inch display unit)
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1206 -
12.2.16 Background Editing (15/19-inch Display Unit)
Editing one program during execution of another program is referred to as background editing. You can 
perform the same edit operations in the background as those in normal editing (foreground editing).
On a 15-inch or 19-inch display, you can perform background editing for the programs displayed in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
multiple tiled windows. You can switch from a program displayed in one of the tiled windows to another 
to perform copy, paste, and other edit operations, which allows you to edit programs efficiently.
You can edit four programs simultaneously.
Function
- Background editing
A program other than the currently selected program can be edited. Background editing can be performed 
in any mode.
- EDIT mode and reference mode


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- EDIT mode and reference mode
When background editing is started in the EDIT mode, the program can be edited. When background 
editing is started in the reference mode, the program is opened in the read-only mode and cannot be 
edited.
While a program opened in the EDIT mode cannot be run, a program opened in the reference mode can 
be run.
- Program selected in the foreground
If the program selected in the foreground is specified as a program to be edited in the background,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
background editing is started in the read-only mode. The text at an arbitrary position of the program 
currently being executed can be checked.
- Switching from the program directory screen to the editing screen
By selecting a program from the program folder screen, background editing can be started. 
On the program folder screen, move the cursor to a program to be edited in the background, then press the 
MDI key . The screen display switches to the background editing screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Background editing can be started without entering a program name.
- Background editing on a multi-path system
Background editing does not depend on the path.
Even if the path to be operated is changed using the path selection signal, the background editing 
currently being executed is just continued.
NOTE
The following programs cannot be edited in the background. They can be 
opened only in the read-only mode.
- Running program
- Main program
- Program with the edit disable attribute


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1207 -
Display
When background editing starts, the ordinary program editing screen switches to the background editing 
screen.
When two or more programs are edited in the background, the screen is split to display these programs. 
For a 15-inch or 19-inch display unit, up to four programs can be edited at the same time.
- Word editing
Fig. 12.2.16 (a) shows background word editing performed simultaneously for two programs (right and


key: chroma:document
string_value:
left programs). On the status line at the top of the window for each program, the program name and 
“BG-EDIT” (indicating background editing in progress) are displayed.
The status line of the program being edited is displayed in reverse video.
Fig. 12.2.16 (a) Background editing screen (word editing) (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1208 -
- Character editing
Fig. 12.2.16 (b) shows background character editing performed simultaneously for two programs (right 
and left programs). Similarly to word editing, at the top of the window for each program, the status line is 
displayed. In addition, the current input mode (INSERT MODE or OVERWRITE MODE) is displayed at 
the upper right of the screen for character editing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The status line of the program being edited is displayed in reverse video.
Fig. 12.2.16 (b) Background editing screen (character editing) (15-inch display unit)
- Editing status
The following items are displayed on the status line and program editing area according to the 
background editing status.
Editing status Displayed items
No program selected (BG-EDIT)
“NO PROGRAM” is displayed in the editing area.
Program opened program-name + (BG-EDIT)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Read-only program opened program-name + (BG:READ ONLY)
The contents of the program are displayed in green.
Starting background editing from the editing screen
Procedure (word editing)
Method 1
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 
3 Enter a program name.
4 Press soft key [BG EDIT].
NOTE
1 Background editing is performed in the EDIT mode.
2 If a nonexistent program is specified, a new program is created.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1209 -
Method 2
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 
3 Press soft key [BG EDIT].
4 Enter a program name.
5 Press soft key [EDIT EXEC] to start background editing in the EDIT mode or soft key [REF EXEC] 
to start background editing in the reference mode. 
NOTE
If a nonexistent program is specified,
- Pressing soft key [EDIT EXEC] causes a new program to be created.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Pressing soft key [REF EXEC] causes the warning message “SPECIFIED 
PROGRAM NOT FOUND” to appear. A new program is not created.
Method 3
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 
3 Press soft key [BG EDIT].
4 Press soft key [EDIT EXEC] to start background editing in the EDIT mode or soft key [REF EXEC] 
to start background editing in the reference mode. At this time, “NO PROGRAM” is displayed on 
the screen.
5 Enter a program name.
6 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH].
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
If a nonexistent program is specified, the warning message “SPECIFIED 
PROGRAM NOT FOUND” is displayed. A new program is not created.
Procedure (character editing)
Method 1
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM]. 
3 Press soft key [BG EDIT].
4 Enter a program name.
5 Press soft key [EDIT EXEC] to start background editing in the EDIT mode or soft key [REF EXEC] 
to start background editing in the reference mode. 
NOTE
If a nonexistent program is specified,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Pressing soft key [EDIT EXEC] causes a new program to be created.
- Pressing soft key [REF EXEC] causes the warning message “SPECIFIED 
PROGRAM NOT FOUND” to appear. A new program is not created.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1210 -
Method 2
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM].
3 Press soft key [BG EDIT].
4 Press soft key [EDIT EXEC] to start background editing in the EDIT mode or soft key [REF EXEC] 
to start background editing in the reference mode. At this time, “NO PROGRAM” is displayed on 
the screen.
5 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH].
6 Enter a program name.
7 Press soft key [PROGRM NAME].
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
If a nonexistent program is specified, the warning message “SPECIFIED 
PROGRAM NOT FOUND” is displayed. A new program is not created.
Starting background editing from the program folder screen
By selecting a program from the program folder screen, background editing can be started. The cursor is 
used to select a program. You do not need to enter a program name.
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [FOLDER]. 
3 Move the cursor to a program to be edited.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press the MDI key . The screen display is switched to the background editing screen.
NOTE
When background editing is started from the program folder screen, the EDIT 
mode is set.
For the following programs, the reference mode is set, however:
- Running program
- Main program
- Program with the edit disable attribute


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1211 -
Background editing operation
- Editing operation
The same editing operations as performed in the foreground can be performed.
- Switching from a program to another for editing
To switch from a program to another for editing when editing multiple programs simultaneously in the 
background, press key, then or .
- Editing operation in the read-only mode


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The procedure for ending background editing of one program and that for ending all background editing 
of multiple programs are shown below.
- Ending editing of one program
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 
3 Select a program for which to end editing.
4 Press horizontal soft key [BG END]. 
- Ending editing of all programs
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 
3 Press horizontal soft key [BG ALL END].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1212 -
12.2.17 Stamping the Machining Time (15/19-inch Display Unit)
The execution times of the most recently executed ten programs can be displayed in hours, minutes, and 
seconds.
The calculated machining time can be inserted as a comment of the program to check the machining time 
on the program folder screen.
Procedure for stamping the machining time
Procedure
- Displaying the machining time
1 Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [TIME]. The machining time display screen appears.
Fig. 12.2.17 (a) Machining time display screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1213 -
- Calculating the machining time
1 Select the memory operation mode, then press the key.
2 Select the program screen, then select a program of which machining time you want to calculate.
3 Execute the program to perform actual machining.
4 When the key is pressed or, M02 or M30 is executed, the machining time count operation 
stops. When the machining time display screen is selected, the program number of the stopped main


key: chroma:document
string_value:
program and its machining time are displayed.
5 The Fig. 12.2.17 (b) shows the screen when the machining times of the ten main programs O0020, 
O0040, …, and O0200 are displayed and the screen when the machining time of O0220 is newly 
calculated after that.
Fig. 12.2.17 (b) Stamping the machining time (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1214 -
Procedure for inserting the machining time on the program screen
Procedure
You can display the machining time of a program as a comment of the program. The procedure is shown 
below:
1 To insert the calculated machining time of a program as a comment, the machining time of the 
program must be displayed on the machining time display screen. Before stamping the machining


key: chroma:document
string_value:
time of the program, check that the program number is displayed on the machining time display 
screen.
2 Set the edit mode or background editing state and select the program screen. Then, select a program 
of which machining time you want to insert.
3 For example, the machining time of O0100 is displayed on the machining time display screen. Press 
continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [INSERT TIME] appears. When horizontal soft


key: chroma:document
string_value:
key [INSERT TIME] is pressed, the start of the program is located, and the machining time of the 
program is inserted after the program name.
Press soft key [INSERT TIME].
Fig. 12.2.17 (c) Program screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1215 -
4 If a comment is written in the block containing the program number of a program of which 
machining time is to be inserted, the machining time is inserted after the comment.
Press soft key [INSERT TIME].
Fig. 12.2.17 (d) Program screen (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1216 -
Display on the program folder screen
The machining time of a program inserted in the program as a comment is displayed after the existing 
comment of the program on the program folder screen.
Fig. 12.2.17 (e) Program folder screen (15-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Machining time
The machining time is counted from the initial start after a reset in the memory operation mode to the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
of the program may not be displayed on the machining time display screen. In this case, the machining 
time cannot be inserted in the program even if horizontal soft key [INSERT TIME] is pressed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1217 -
- Correcting the machining time
If an incorrect machining time is calculated (such as when a reset is made during the execution of a 
program), reexecute the program to calculate the correct machining time. The same program number may 
be displayed in two or more lines on the machining time display screen. In this case, the latest calculated 
machining time is inserted in the program.
- States of the stamped machining time


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the following states, the stamped machining time is displayed on the program folder screen as shown 
below.
1 When the comment of a program is longer than 16 characters
The 17th and subsequent characters of the comment are discarded and the machining time display 
field is left blank.
Fig. 12.2.17 (f) When the comment of a program is longer than 16 characters (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1218 -
2 When two or more machining times are stamped
The first machining time is displayed.
Fig. 12.2.17 (g) When two or more machining times are stamped (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1219 -
3 When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS” (H following a 3-digit 
number, M following a 2-digit number, and S following a 2-digit number, in this order)
The machining time display field is left blank.
Fig. 12.2.17 (h) When the format of an inserted machining time is not “hhhHmmMssS” (H following a 3-digit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
number, M following a 2-digit number, and S following a 2-digit number, in this order) (15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1220 -
12.2.18 Screen for Assistance in Entering Tilted Working Plane
Indexing (15/19-inch Display Unit)
The screens for assistance in entering tilted working plane indexing (hereinafter referred to as guidance 
screens) include a command type selection screen and a tilted working plane data setting screen. The 
command type selection screen is used to select a tilted working plane indexing. The tilted working plane


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Creation of a new block
The following describes the procedure for creating a tilted working plane indexing block on guidance 
screens and for inserting the block to a program being edited on a program editing screen.
1 On a program editing screen, display a program to which you want to insert a tilted working plane 
indexing block.
The foreground editing screen, background editing screen, or MDI editing screen should be 
displayed.
• Displaying the foreground editing screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<1> Select the EDIT mode.
<2> Press function key .
<3> Press vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 
• Displaying the background editing screen
<1> Press function key .
<2> Press soft key [FOLDER]. 
<3> Press any of the cursor keys to move the cursor to a program to be edited in the 
background.
<4> Press key.
• Displaying the MDI editing screen
<1> Select the MDI mode.
<2> Press function key .
<3> Press vertical soft key [PROGRAM].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1221 -
The program editing screen is displayed.
2 Press any of the cursor keys to move the cursor to a position where you want to insert a block.
Note that a block created on the guidance screens is inserted after the block at the cursor position. (If 
the block at the cursor position includes a tilted working plane indexing, the existing block is 
modified. See "Modification to an existing block" below.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press continuous menu key several times, and then press horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE
TWP].
The command type selection screen is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1222 -
4 Select a command type with any of the cursor keys, and then press horizontal soft key [SELECT].
The tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed.
5 Enter command data for the setting items.
6 Press horizontal soft key [INSERT]. 
7 Press horizontal soft key [YES]. 
This takes you back to the program editing screen, where the new block is inserted after the block at 
the cursor position.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1223 -
Modification to an existing block
The following describes the procedure for replacing a block in a program being edited on a program 
editing screen, with a tilted working plane indexing block created on a guidance screen.
1 On a program editing screen, display a program to be edited.
(For the procedure for displaying a program editing screen, see step 1 in "Creation of a new block".)
The program editing screen is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press any of the cursor keys to move the cursor to a block to be modified.
For a command extending over more than one block, move the cursor to the first block.
3 Press continuous menu key several times, and then press horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE
TWP]. The tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1224 -
4 Enter command data for setting items to be modified.
5 Press horizontal soft key [ALTER].
6 Press horizontal soft key [YES]. 
This takes you back to the program editing screen, where the block at the cursor position is replaced.
Guidance screen cancellation
Pressing horizontal soft key [CANCEL] on a guidance screen takes you back to the program editing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen. At this time, the data that has been set on the guidance screen is discarded.
NOTE
1 In addition to the above operation, the following operations also cancel a 
guidance screen. The data that has been set on the guidance screen is 
discarded.
• When bit 7 (CPG) of parameter No. 11302 is 1 (setting for automatically 
switching between program-related screens according to CNC mode), the 
CNC mode is changed.
• When a guidance screen is displayed from the foreground editing screen, the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CNC mode is changed to a mode other than EDIT, TJOG, or THND.
• When a guidance screen is displayed from the MDI editing screen, the CNC 
mode is changed to a mode other than MDI.
• When a guidance screen is displayed on a 15/19-inch display unit, the screen 
is switched by a vertical soft key.
• The screen is switched by an MDI key.
• The screen is switched by a path select signal.
• An event that causes screen switching has occurred, including occurrence of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
an alarm, display of an operator message, or signal-based display of a 
screen (such as a tool compensation screen, workpiece shift screen, 
workpiece coordinate system setting screen, or C Language Executor 
screen).
2 If MDI key is pressed after switching from a guidance screen to another 
screen, a program editing screen is displayed, instead of the guidance screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1225 -
Notes
• Conditions under which horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is displayed
Horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is displayed on a program editing screen under the 
following conditions:
1 Foreground editing screen
- The CNC mode is EDIT, TJOG, or THND.
- The editing and display are not prohibited for a program to be edited.
2 Background editing screen
- A program to be edited is not in reference mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- The editing and display are not prohibited for a program to be edited.
3 MDI editing screen
- The CNC mode is MDI.
• Screen displayed when horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is pressed
When horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is pressed, which guidance screen is displayed is 
automatically determined according to the conditions described below.
1 When a tilted working plane indexing is not included in a block at the cursor position on a 
program editing screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
program editing screen
The command type selection screen is displayed. A block created on the guidance screens is 
inserted after the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen.
2 When a tilted working plane indexing is included in a block at the cursor position on a program 
editing screen
The tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed, which shows the data for the tilted 
working plane indexing in the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen. When


key: chroma:document
string_value:
a block of a tool axis direction control command exists immediately after the tilted working 
plane indexing, the command data for the block is also shown. The tilted working plane 
indexing in the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen is replaced with a 
block created on the guidance screen.
NOTE
If the CNC is in the reset state or emergency stop state when horizontal soft key
[GUIDANCE TWP] is pressed on the foreground editing screen or MDI editing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen, the warning "PROGRAM READ FAILED" appears, and the operation
cannot be continued. (Horizontal soft keys other than [CANCEL] are not 
displayed.) Press horizontal soft key [CANCEL] to return to the program editing
screen, and then press horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] again.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1226 -
12.2.18.1 Command type selection screen
The command type selection screen is used to select the type of a tilted working plane indexing you want 
to insert into a program to be edited. One of the following command types can be selected:
• G68.2 / G68.4 (Euler’s angle)
• G68.2 / G68.4 P1 (Roll-Pitch-Yaw angle)
• G68.2 / G68.4 P2 (3 points specification)
• G68.2 / G68.4 P3 (2 vectors specification)
• G68.2 / G68.4 P4 (Projection angle)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• G68.3 (Tool Axis Direction)
G68.2 is an absolute command, and G68.4 is an incremental command.
Fig. 12.2.18.1 (a) Command type selection screen (15-inch display unit)
Selection of a command type
1 Press cursor key or to move the cursor to a command type you want to select. As the 
cursor is moved, the figure corresponding to the command type at the cursor position is displayed.
2 When horizontal soft key [SELECT] is pressed, the command type at the cursor position is accepted,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and the tilted working plane data setting screen is displayed.
NOTE
If the warning "PROGRAM READ FAILED" appears when the command type 
selection screen is displayed, the operation cannot be continued. (Horizontal soft 
keys other than [CANCEL] are not displayed.) Press horizontal soft key 
[CANCEL] to return to the program editing screen, and then press horizontal soft 
key [GUIDANCE TWP] again.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1227 -
12.2.18.2 Tilted working plane data setting screen
The tilted working plane data setting screen is used to set specified tilted working plane data required for 
a tilted working plane indexing of the type that has been selected on the command type selection screen 
or has been selected when horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is pressed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Different types of tilted working plane data setting screen are provided for different command types. For 
details of each type of tilted working plane data setting screen, see "12.2.18.3 Details of the tilted working 
plane data setting screen".
Fig. 12.2.18.2 (a) Tilted working plane data setting screen-3 points specification(15-inch display unit)
Display of the tilted working plane data setting screen
When a new block is created, the initial values are set in the setting and selection items.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When an existing block is modified, the command data for the block at the cursor position on the program 
editing screen is reflected in the setting and selection items.
NOTE
1 For existing block modification, if the guidance screen is displayed when the 
cursor is placed in the middle of multiple blocks for a command, the parameters 
for the block(s) before the cursor are not reflected in the setting and selection


key: chroma:document
string_value:
items, but only the parameters for the block(s) after the cursor are reflected. If no 
data is to be reflected in a setting or selection item, the initial value is set in the 
item.
2 For existing block modification, only the commands with parameter-specified 
axis names are reflected in the setting items on the screen. (The values 
specified in data for commands with incorrect axis names are not reflected in the 
setting items.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1228 -
Command data input
• Item for which to enter a value
Press cursor key or to move the cursor to an item you want to set.
Enter a value, and then press the key or horizontal soft key [INPUT].
Example)
When the origin of a feature coordinate system is set as shown above, addresses X, Y, and Z 
are specified as follows:
G68.2 X0.001 Y0.01 Z1000 ...


key: chroma:document
string_value:
G68.2 X0.001 Y0.01 Z1000 ...
For two items "Tool Offset Number" and "From TCP to center", the state with no command can be 
set by deleting the specified values according to the following procedure.
1 Press cursor key or to move the cursor to the item "Tool Offset Number" or 
"From TCP to Center".
2 Press or horizontal soft key [INPUT] without entering anything.
• Item to be selected from a list
1 Press cursor key or to move the cursor to an item you want to set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press cursor key or to move the cursor to an item you want to select.
Example)
Order of rotation for Roll-Pitch Yaw angle
Insertion of a block
If the guidance screen is displayed when the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen 
does not include a tilted working plane indexing, horizontal soft key [INSERT] is displayed on the tilted 
working plane data setting screen. An operation for inserting a tilted working plane indexing block is 
described below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
described below.
For warnings that may be issued at the time of block insertion, see "Limitation".
1 Press horizontal soft key [INSERT].
The confirmation message "ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO EXECUTE?" is displayed, and 
horizontal soft keys [YES] and [NO] are displayed.
2 Press horizontal soft key [YES].
A block is created from the command type and command data and then is inserted after the block at


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the cursor position in the program to be edited. After block insertion, the guidance screen is closed 
and the program editing screen is displayed.
Pressing horizontal soft key [NO] takes you back to the tilted working plane data setting screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1229 -
↓
Example)
G00 X0.; When the guidance screen is displayed and the 3-point specification is 
selected as a command type for block insertion, a created block is inserted 
after the block at the cursor position.
G00 X0.;
G68.2 P2 Q0...
G68.2 P2 Q1...
G68.2 P2 Q2...
G68.2 P2 Q3...
Replacement of a block
If the guidance screen is displayed when the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
includes a tilted working plane indexing, horizontal soft key [ALTER] is displayed on the tilted working 
plane data setting screen. An operation for replacing a tilted working plane indexing block is described 
below.
For warnings that may be issued at the time of block replacement, see "Limitation".
1 Press horizontal soft key [ALTER].
The confirmation message "ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO EXECUTE?" is displayed, and 
horizontal soft keys [YES] and [NO] are displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press horizontal soft key [YES].
A block is created from the command type and command data and then replaces the tilted working 
plane indexing in the block at the cursor position on the program editing screen. After block 
replacement, the guidance screen is closed and the program editing screen is displayed.
Pressing horizontal soft key [NO] takes you back to the tilted working plane data setting screen.
NOTE
1 If a block to be replaced includes a command other than a tilted working plane


key: chroma:document
string_value:
indexing, the command is deleted during block replacement. However, only the 
sequence number at the beginning is preserved.
2 If the guidance screen is displayed when the cursor is placed in the middle of 
multiple blocks for a command, the block(s) before the cursor are not replaced. 
These blocks remain unchanged after replacement.
3 If horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] is pressed when the cursor is placed on 
a block of a tool axis direction control command, the command type selection


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen is displayed in new insertion mode. A block created on the guidance 
screens is inserted after the block of the tool axis direction control command.
Limitation
The following lists the warnings that may be issued at the time of block insertion or replacement.
If a warning is displayed, return to the program editing screen with horizontal soft key [CANCEL] and 
press horizontal soft key [GUIDANCE TWP] again, or eliminate the cause of the warning and retry the 
operation.
Warning Description


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Warning Description
“PROGRAM WRITE 
FAILED”
• The guidance screen was displayed from the foreground editing screen or MDI 
editing screen, and a block insertion or replacement operation was performed 
when the CNC was in the reset state or emergency stop state.
“PROGRAM CANNOT BE 
WRITTEN”
• A block insertion or replacement operation was performed after a program to be 
edited was updated due to program downloading by an external application 
while the guidance screen was displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• A block insertion or replacement operation was performed after the start of the 
main program was located by a reset while the guidance screen was displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1230 -
Warning Description
“WRITE PROTECT” • A block insertion or replacement operation was performed when the editing or 
display was prohibited for a program to be edited.
• A block insertion or replacement operation was performed when the memory 
protection signal (KEY signal) for program registration or editing was off.
• A block insertion or replacement operation was performed when the operation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
level of the 8-level data protection function was lower than the protection level of 
a part program editing operation.
Display of the command type selection screen
When horizontal soft key [COMMAND TYPE] is pressed, the command type selection screen is 
displayed. When the command type is changed on the command type selection screen, the values set on 
the tilted working plane data setting screen are cleared.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When a tilted working plane indexing is included in the block at the cursor position on the program 
editing screen, you can display the guidance screen, change the command type on the command type 
selection screen, and then perform block replacement. In this case, the block at the cursor position on the 
program editing screen is replaced with a block created from the command type and command data that 
have been set.
12.2.18.3 Details of the tilted working plane data setting screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The following six tilted working plane indexing are supported.
For details of the commands, see II-22.3, "TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING".
• G68.2 / G68.4 (Euler’s angle)
• G68.2 / G68.4 P1 (Roll-Pitch-Yaw angle)
• G68.2 / G68.4 P2 (3 points specification)
• G68.2 / G68.4 P3 (2 vectors specification)
• G68.2 / G68.4 P4 (Projection angle)
• G68.3 (Tool Axis Direction)
G68.2 is an absolute command, and G68.4 is an incremental command.
G68.2 / G68.4(Euler’s angle)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
G68.2 / G68.4(Euler’s angle)
Fig. 12.2.18.3 (a) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Euler’s angle(15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1231 -
• Multi Type
Absolute:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of 
whether tilted working plane indexing mode is set.
Incremental:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a feature coordinate system if tilted working 
plane indexing mode is already set.
• Origin of Feature Coordinate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Origin of Feature Coordinate
Specify the origin (X, Y, and Z of point P) of a feature coordinate system as coordinates in a 
workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type).
• Euler’s angle
I : Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the 
absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
After this rotation, a feature coordinate system is obtained by shifting the origin of the 
workpiece coordinate system by the coordinates specified in "Origin of Feature Coordinate".
G68.2 / G68.4(Roll-Pitch-Yaw angle)
Fig. 12.2.18.3 (b) Tilted working plane data setting screen- Roll-Pitch-Yaw angle(15-inch display unit)
• Multi Type
Absolute:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of 
whether tilted working plane indexing mode is set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1232 -
• Order of Rotation
Select an order in which the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis are rotated in a workpiece coordinate system 
(for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type). The 
selectable rotation orders are as follows:
1st rotation axis 2nd rotation axis 3rd rotation axis
X→Y→Z X-axis Y-axis Z-axis
X→Z→Y X-axis Z-axis Y-axis
Y→X→Z Y-axis X-axis Z-axis
Y→Z→X Y-axis Z-axis X-axis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Y→Z→X Y-axis Z-axis X-axis
Z→X→Y Z-axis X-axis Y-axis
Z→Y→X Z-axis Y-axis X-axis
• Origin of Feature Coordinate
Specify the origin (X, Y, and Z of point P) of a feature coordinate system as coordinates in a 
workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type).
• Rotation Angle about X-axis
Specify an angle of rotation around the X-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute


key: chroma:document
string_value:
type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type).
• Rotation Angle about Y-axis
Specify an angle of rotation around the Y-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute 
type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type).
• Rotation Angle about Z-axis
Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute 
type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
G68.2 / G68.4(3 points specification)
Fig. 12.2.18.3 (c) Tilted working plane data setting screen- 3 points specification(15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1233 -
• Multi Type
Absolute:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of 
whether tilted working plane indexing mode is set.
Incremental:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a feature coordinate system if tilted working 
plane indexing mode is already set.
• Shift of the Origin


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Shift of the Origin
Specify, in a feature coordinate system, an amount of shift from the feature coordinate system origin 
specified for the 1st point (point P1).
• Rotation Angle about the Z-axis in F-Coordinate
Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a feature coordinate system. The direction of 
rotation angle R is positive when a rotation is made clockwise as viewed in the Z-axis direction of 
the feature coordinate system.
• 1st point (Origin of Feature Coordinate)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Specify the origin (X, Y, and Z of point P1) of a feature coordinate system as coordinates in a 
workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type).
• 2nd point
Specify the coordinates (X, Y, and Z of point P2) of the 2nd point as coordinates in a workpiece
coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
incremental type). The 1st point and 2nd point determine the X-axis of the feature coordinate 
system.
• 3rd point
Specify the coordinates (X, Y, and Z of point P3) of the 3rd point as coordinates in a workpiece
coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type). Among the directions normal to the X-axis, a direction with a smaller angle 
relative to the P1 → P3 vector is the Y-axis of the feature coordinate system.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
G68.2 / G68.4(2 vectors specification)
Fig. 12.2.18.3 (d) Tilted working plane data setting screen-2 vectors specification(15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1234 -
• Multi Type
Absolute:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of 
whether tilted working plane indexing mode is set.
Incremental:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a feature coordinate system if tilted working 
plane indexing mode is already set.
• Origin of Feature Coordinate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Origin of Feature Coordinate
Specify the origin (X, Y, and Z of point P) of a feature coordinate system as coordinates in a 
workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type).
• V1 (X’) vector
Specify the X-axis direction vector of a feature coordinate system as values in a workpiece 
coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type).
• V2 (Z’) vector


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• V2 (Z’) vector
Specify the Z-axis direction vector of a feature coordinate system as values in a workpiece 
coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type).
G68.2 / G68.4(Projection angle)
Fig. 12.2.18.3 (e) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Projection angle(15-inch display unit)
• Multi Type
Absolute:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a workpiece coordinate system, regardless of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
whether tilted working plane indexing mode is set.
Incremental:
It is assumed that values of specified data are in a feature coordinate system if tilted working 
plane indexing mode is already set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1235 -
• Origin of Feature Coordinate
Specify the origin (X, Y, and Z of point P) of a feature coordinate system as coordinates in a 
workpiece coordinate system (for the absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the 
incremental type).
• Projection angle
I : Specify a projection angle relative to the X-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type).
J : Specify a projection angle relative to the Y-axis of a workpiece coordinate system (for the 
absolute type) or the current feature coordinate system (for the incremental type).
K : Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a feature coordinate system.
G68.3(Tool Axis Direction)
Fig. 12.2.18.3 (f) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Tool Axis Direction(15-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(When "No" is selected in "Origin command of Feature Coordinate")
Fig. 12.2.18.3 (g) Tilted working plane data setting screen-Tool Axis Direction(15-inch display unit)
(When "Yes" is selected in "Origin command of Feature Coordinate")


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1236 -
• Origin command of Feature Coordinate
Select whether to specify a feature coordinate system origin.
Yes : A feature coordinate system origin is specified.
No : A feature coordinate system origin is not specified.
• Origin of Feature Coordinate
Specify the origin (X, Y, and Z of point P) of a feature coordinate system as coordinates in a 
workpiece coordinate system.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
workpiece coordinate system.
This setting cannot be made if "No" is selected in "Origin command of Feature Coordinate".
• Rotation Angle about the Z-axis in F-Coordinate
Specify an angle of rotation around the Z-axis of a feature coordinate system. The direction of 
rotation angle R is positive when a rotation is made clockwise as viewed in the Z-axis direction of 
the feature coordinate system.
12.2.18.4 Limitation
This function is supported on 10.4-inch, 15-inch, and 19-inch display units.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1237 -
12.3 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY 
Screens of a 10.4-inch display unit
Press function key to display or set tool compensation values and other data.
This section describes how to display or set the following data:
1. Tool compensation value
2. Settings
3. Sequence number comparison and stop
4. Run time and part count
5. Workpiece origin offset value
6. Custom macro common variables
7. Software operator’s panel


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. Software operator’s panel
8. Tool management data
9. Display language switching
10. Protection of data at eight levels
11. Precision level selection
12. Tool life management data
13. Pattern data input
The software operator’s panel, display language switching, precision level selection, and pattern data 
input depend on the specifications of the machine tool builder. See the manual issued by the machine tool 
builder for details.
12.3.1 Displaying and Entering Setting Data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Data such as the TV check flag and punch code is set on the setting data screen. On this screen, the 
operator can also enable/disable parameter writing, enable/disable the automatic insertion of sequence 
numbers in program editing, and perform settings for the sequence number comparison and stop function.
See III-9.2 for automatic insertion of sequence numbers.
See III-12.3.2 for the sequence number comparison and stop function. This subsection describes how to 
set data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
set data.
Procedure for setting the setting data
Procedure
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Press function key .
3 Press soft key [SETTING] to display the setting data screen.
This screen consists of several pages.
Press page key or until the desired screen is displayed.
An example of the setting data screen is shown below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1238 -
Fig. 12.3.1 (a) SETTING (HANDY) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.3.1 (b) SETTING (MIRROR IMAGE) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys .
5 Enter a new value and press soft key [INPUT].
Explanation
- PARAMETER WRITE
Setting whether parameter writing is enabled or disabled.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
- TV CHECK
Setting to perform TV check.
0 : No TV check


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1239 -
- OUTPUT CODE
Setting code when data is output through RS-232C interface.
0 : EIA code output
1 : ISO code output
- INPUT UNIT
Setting a program input unit, inch or metric system
0 : Metric
1 : Inch
- I/O CHANNEL
Using channel of RS-232C interface.
0 : Channel 0
1 : Channel 1
2 : Channel 2
- SEQUENCE NO.
Setting of whether to perform automatic insertion of the sequence number or not at program edit in the 
EDIT mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
EDIT mode.
0 : Does not perform automatic sequence number insertion.
1 : Perform automatic sequence number insertion.
- PROGRAM FORMAT
Setting of whether to use the Series 15 format.
0: Uses the standard format.
1: Uses the Series 15 format.
For the Series 15 format, refer to Chapter, “MEMORY OPERATION USING Series 15 FORMAT” in the 
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (T series : B-64694EN-1) or Chapter, “MEMORY OPERATION USING 
Series 15 FORMAT” in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL (M series : B-64694EN-2).
- SEQUENCE STOP


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- SEQUENCE STOP
Setting the sequence number with which the operation stops for the sequence number comparison and 
stop function and the number of the program to which the sequence number belongs
T
- CCR / DDDP
This setting item is displayed only when the chamfering or corner R and the direct drawing dimension 
programming are enabled. These functions cannot be use at same time. Setting of which function is 
enabled.
0:Chamfering or corner R is enabled.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1:Direct drawing dimensions programming function is enabled.
- MIRROR IMAGE
Setting of mirror image ON/OFF for each axes.
0 : Mirror image off
1 : Mirror image on
- Others
Page key or can also be pressed to display the SETTING (TIMER) screen. See III-12.3.3
for this screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1240 -
12.3.2 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop
If a block containing a specified sequence number appears in the program being executed, operation 
enters single block mode after the block is executed.
Procedure for sequence number comparison and stop
Procedure
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Press function key .
3 Press chapter selection soft key [SETTING]. 
4 Press page key or several times until the following screen is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.3.2 (a) SETTING (HANDY) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 Enter in (PROGRAM NO.) for SEQUENCE STOP the number (1 to 99999999) of the program 
containing the sequence number with which operation stops.
6 Enter in (SEQUENCE NO.) for SEQUENCE STOP (with eight or less digits) the sequence number 
with which operation is stopped.
7 When automatic operation is executed, operation enters single block mode at the block containing 
the sequence number which has been set.
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
- Sequence number after the program is executed
After the specified sequence number is found during the execution of the program, the sequence number 
setting for sequence number compensation and stop becomes “-1”.
- Exceptional blocks
If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block in which all commands are those to be 
processed within the CNC control unit, the execution does not stop at that block.
[Example] N1 #1=1 ;
N2 IF[#1 EQ 1]GOTO 08 ;
N3 GOTO 09 ;
N4 M98 P1000 ;


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1241 -
In the example shown above, if the predetermined sequence number is found, the execution of the 
program does not stop.
- Stop in the canned cycle
If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block which has a canned cycle command, the 
execution of the program stops after the return operation is completed.
- When the same sequence number is found several times in the program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the predetermined sequence number appears twice or more in a program, the execution of the program 
stops after the block in which the predetermined sequence number is found for the first time is executed.
- Block to be repeated a specified number of times
If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block which is to be executed repeatedly, the 
execution of the program stops after the block is executed specified times.
12.3.3 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Various run times, the total number of machined parts, number of parts required, and number of machined 
parts can be displayed. 
This data can be set by parameters or on this screen (except for the total number of machined parts and 
the time during which the power is on, which can be set only by parameters).
This screen can also display the clock time. The time can be set on the screen.
Procedure for Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count and Time
Procedure
1 Select the MDI mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Press function key .
3 Press chapter selection soft key [SETTING]. 
4 Press page key or several times until the following screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.3 (a) SETTING (TIMER) screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1242 -
5 To set the number of parts required, move the cursor to PARTS REQUIRED and enter the number 
of parts to be machined.
6 To set the clock, move the cursor to DATE or TIME, enter a new date or time, then press soft key 
[INPUT].
Explanation
- PARTS TOTAL
This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
executed. This value cannot be set on this screen. Set the value in parameter No. 6712.
- PARTS REQUIRED
It is used for setting the number of machined parts required.
When the “0” is set to it, there is no limitation to the number of parts.
Also, its setting can be made by the parameter No 6713.
- PARTS COUNT
This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
executed. The value can also be set by parameter No. 6711. In general, this value is reset when it reaches 
the number of parts required. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
- POWER ON
Displays the total time which the power is on. This value cannot be set on this screen but can be preset in 
parameter No. 6750.
- RUN TIME
Indicates the total run time during automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This value can be preset in parameter No. 6751 or No. 6752.
- CUTTING TIME
Displays the total time taken by cutting that involves cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and 
circular interpolation (G02 or G03). This value can be preset in parameter No. 6753 or No. 6754.
- FREE PURPOSE
This value can be used, for example, as the total time during which coolant flows. Refer to the manual 
issued by the machine tool builder for details.
- CYCLE TIME


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- CYCLE TIME
Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time. This is 
automatically preset to 0 when a cycle start is performed at reset state. It is preset to 0 even when power is 
removed.
- DATA and TIME
Displays the current date and time. The date and time can be set on this screen.
- Usage
When the command of M02 or M30 is executed, the total number of machined parts and the number of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
machined parts are incremented by one. Therefore, create the program so that M02 or M30 is executed 
every time the processing of one part is completed. Furthermore, if an M code set to the parameter No. 
6710 is executed, counting is made in the similar manner. Also, it is possible to disable counting even if 
M02 or M30 is executed (bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1). For details, see the manual 
issued by machine tool builders.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1243 -
Limitation
- Run time and part count settings
Negative value cannot be set. Also, the setting of “M” and “S” of run time is valid from 0 to 59.
Negative value may not be set to the total number of machined parts.
- Time settings
Neither negative value nor the value exceeding the value in the following table can be set.
Table 12.3.3
Item Maximum value Item Maximum value
Year 2096 Hour 23
Month 12 Minute 59
Day 31 Second 59


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Day 31 Second 59
12.3.4 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value
Displays the workpiece origin offset for each workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59, G54.1 P1 to 
G54.1 P48 and G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P300) and external workpiece origin offset. 
The workpiece origin offset value and external workpiece origin offset value can be set on this screen.
Procedure for displaying and setting the workpiece origin offset value
Procedure
1 Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection soft key [WORK]. 
The workpiece coordinate system setting screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.4 (a) WORK COORDINATES screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1244 -
3 The screen for displaying the workpiece origin offset values consists of two or more pages. 
Display a desired page in either of the following two ways:
• Press the page key or .
• Enter the workpiece coordinate system number (0 : external workpiece origin offset, 1 to 6: 
workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59, P1 to P48 : workpiece coordinate systems G54.1 P1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to G54.1 P48, P1 to P300 : workpiece coordinate systems G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P300) and press 
operation selection soft key [NO.SRH].
4 Turn off the data protection key to enable writing.
5 Move the cursor to the workpiece origin offset to be changed.
6 Enter a desired value by pressing numeric keys, then press soft key [INPUT]. The entered value is 
specified in the workpiece origin offset value. Or, by entering a desired value with numeric keys and


key: chroma:document
string_value:
pressing soft key [+INPUT], the entered value can be added to the previous offset value.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other offset values.
8 Turn on the data protection key to disable writing.
NOTE
When the axis name set in parameter No.1020 is not valid, the workpiece origin 
offset value of the axis should be set to 0.
12.3.5 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured
This function is used to compensate for the difference between the programmed workpiece coordinate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
system and the actual workpiece coordinate system. The measured offset for the origin of the workpiece 
coordinate system can be input on the screen so that the command values match the actual dimensions.
Selecting the new coordinate system matches the programmed coordinate system with the actual 
coordinate system.
Procedure for direct input of workpiece origin offset value measured
Procedure
y
Programmed workpiece 
origin
New offset
Previous offset
Origin
O'
Y
Surface A
Surface B
β
a
X


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1245 -
1 When the workpiece is shaped as shown above, position the reference tool manually until it touches 
surface A of the workpiece.
2 Retract the tool without changing the Y coordinate.
3 Measure distance a between surface A and the programmed origin of the workpiece coordinate 
system as shown above.
4 Press function key .
5 To display the WORK COORDINATES screen, press the chapter selection soft key [WORK].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.3.5 (a) WORK COORDINATES screen (10.4-inch display unit)
6 Position the cursor to the workpiece origin offset value to be set.
7 Press the address key for the axis along which the offset is to be set (Y-axis in this example).
8 Enter the measured value (a) then press soft key [MEASUR].
9 Move the reference tool manually until it touches surface B of the workpiece.
10 Retract the tool without changing the X coordinate.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11 Enter the measured value of distance (β) to surface B as an X value as with steps 7 and 8.
Limitation
- Consecutive input
Offsets for two or more axes cannot be input at the same time.
- During program execution
This function cannot be used while a program is being executed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1246 -
12.3.6 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables
Displays common variables (#100 to #149 or #100 to #199, and #500 to #531 or #500 to #999) on the 
screen. 
The values for variables can be set on this screen. 
Relative coordinates can also be set to variables.
Procedure for displaying and setting custom macro common variables
Procedure
1 Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key , chapter selection soft key [MACRO], and soft key [(OPRT)] in 
the stated order.
The following screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.6 (a) CUSTOM MACRO screen (10.4-inch display unit)
3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set using either of the following methods:
• Enter the variable number and press soft key [NO.SRH].
• Move the cursor to the variable number to set by pressing page keys and/or and 
cursor keys , , , and/or .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
cursor keys , , , and/or .
4 Enter data with numeric keys and press soft key [INPUT].
5 To set a relative coordinate in a variable, press address key , , or , then press soft 
key [INP.C.].
6 To set a blank in a variable, just press soft key [INPUT]. The value field for the variable becomes 
blank.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1247 -
Explanation
If the value of a variable produced by an operation is not displayable, an indication below is provided.
When the significant number of digits is 12 (with bit 0 (F16) of parameter No. 6008 set to 0):
Variable value range Variable value indication
0 < Variable value < +0.00000000001 +Underflow
0 > Variable value > -0.00000000001 -Underflow
Variable value > 999999999999 +Overflow
Variable value < -999999999999 -Overflow


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the significant number of digits is 8 (with bit 0 (F16) of parameter No. 6008 set to 1):
Variable value range Variable value indication
0 < Variable value < +0.0000001 +Underflow
0 > Variable value > -0.0000001 -Underflow
Variable value > 99999999 +Overflow
Variable value < -99999999 -Overflow
12.3.7 Displaying and Setting Real Time Custom Macro Data
Real time macro variables (RTM variables) are dedicated to real time custom macros.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
RTM variables are divided into temporary real time macro variables (temporary RTM variables) and 
permanent real time macro variables (permanent RTM variables).
The values of permanent RTM variables are kept stored after the power is turned off.
Temporary RTM variables are cleared to 0 when the power is turned off.
System variables (DI/DO variables) dedicated to real time custom macros are used to read and write PMC


key: chroma:document
string_value:
interface signals. Data can be read and written in bit and byte units. Before writing a signal, release the 
protection of the corresponding variable on the PMC signal protect screen.
Displaying and setting real time custom macro variables
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times, then press chapter selection soft key [R.TIME
MACRO]. The following screen appears:
Fig. 12.3.7 (a) REAL TIME MACRO screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1248 -
3 To display or set real time custom macro variables whose values are not stored at power-off, press 
soft key [TEMP. DATA].
4 To display or set real time custom macro variables whose values are stored at power-off, press soft 
key [PERM. DATA].
5 Move the cursor to the number of a real time custom macro variable you want to set using either of 
the following methods:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the following methods:
• Enter the number of a real time custom macro variable and press soft key [NO. SRH].
• Move the cursor to the number of a real time custom macro variable you want to set by 
pressing page keys and/or and cursor keys , , , and/or .
6 Enter data.
Displaying and setting DI/DO variables
Procedure
For setting in byte units:
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times, then press chapter selection soft key [R.TIME 
MACRO]. The following screen appears:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press soft key [BYTE SELECT]. The following screen appears:
Fig. 12.3.7 (b) BYTE SELECT screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the number of a DI/DO variable you want to set using either of the following 
methods:
• Enter the number and press soft key [NO. SRH].
• Move the cursor to a desired number by pressing page keys and/or and cursor 
keys , , , and/or .
5 Enter data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1249 -
12.3.8 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel
Operations on the MDI unit can substitute for the functions of switches on the machine operator’s panel. 
This means that a mode selection, jog feed override selection, and so forth can be made with operations 
on the MDI unit, eliminating the need to use the corresponding switches on the machine operator’s panel.
Jog feed can also be performed using numeric keys.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure for displaying and setting the software operator’s panel
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key , then press chapter selection soft key [OPR].
3 The screen consists of several pages. Press page key or until the desired screen is 
displayed.
Fig. 12.3.8 (a) Page 1 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (without the manual handle feed function) 
(10.4-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.3.8 (b) Page 1 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (with the manual handle feed function)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1250 -
Fig. 12.3.8 (c) Page 2 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or .
5 Press the cursor key or to match the mark to an arbitrary position and set the 
desired condition.
6 Press one of the following arrow keys to perform jog feed. Press the key together with an 
arrow key to perform jog rapid traverse.
Fig. 12.3.8 (d) MDI arrow keys
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
- Valid operations
The valid operations on the software operator’s panel are shown below. Whether to use each group can be 
chosen using parameter No. 7200. Those groups that are not used are not displayed on the software
operator’s panel.
Group1 : Mode selection
Group2 : Selection of jog feed axis, Manual rapid traverse
Group3 : Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of manual pulse magnification 
Group4 : Jog feederate, feederate override, rapid traverse override


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Group5 : Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
Group6 : Protect key
Group7 : Feed hold
- Screens on which jog feed is valid
When the LCD indicates other than the software operator’s panel screen and self-diagnosis screen, jog 
feed is not conducted even if the arrow key is pushed. This function cannot be used when the virtual MDI 
key function is used.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1251 -
- Jog feed and arrow keys
The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set with parameters Nos. 7210 to 
7217.
- General purpose switches
For the meanings of these switches, refer to the manual issued by machine tool builder.
12.3.9 Setting and Displaying Tool Management Data
The tool management function totally manages tool information including tool offsets and tool life 
information.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
information.
This function provides a magazine screen and tool management screen. This subsection explains how to 
set these screens.
12.3.9.1 Displaying and setting magazine screen
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
Alternatively, press function key several times until the tool management screen appears.
Press soft key [MAGAZINE].
Fig. 12.3.9.1 (a) Tool management magazine screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 By using the page keys, cursor keys, and soft keys [←] and [→], move the cursor to the pot No. 
position of the magazine for which you want to set or modify data.
Alternatively, type the number of the tool management data you wan to set or modify, and press soft 
key [NO. SRH].
4 Press soft key [EDIT]. 
5 To set the tool management data number of a pot, type the tool management data number, then press 
soft key [INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
soft key [INPUT].
To delete the tool management data number set for a pot, follow the steps below.
<1> Press soft key [ERASE]. 
<2> Press soft key [CURDAT]. To delete the tool management data numbers registered for all pots, 
press soft key [ALL].
<3> Press soft key [EXEC]. Alternatively, type 0.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1252 -
6 To end the edit operation, press soft key [EXIT].
This returns the screen display to the conventional tool management screen.
Explanation
- Another method
Magazine data can be input/output also by using external I/O devices.
See III-8, “DATA I/O”.
- Displayed data
POT : As many pots as specified in parameter No. 13222, 13227, 13232, or 13237 (settable for


key: chroma:document
string_value:
each magazine) are displayed. The starting pot number can be set for each magazine in 
parameter No. 13223, 13228, 13233, or 13238.
NO. : Tool management data numbers are displayed.
In the following cases, tools cannot be set in magazines:
1. A tool management data number beyond the range from 0 to (the number of valid pairs 
in parameter No. 13220) is set.
2. Tool management data is invalid (bit 1 of tool information is 0).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3. The tool management data number to be set is already set for another pot.
TYPE NO. : Tool type numbers corresponding to tool management data numbers are displayed.
Values cannot be set on this screen.
SPDL : The tool management data numbers and tool type numbers of spindle positions are 
displayed.
WAIT : The tool management data numbers and tool type numbers of wait positions are displayed.
- Edit mode
To edit data, press soft key [EDIT] to enter tool management data edit mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Tool management data number
Tool management data numbers can optionally be extended to 64, 240, or 1000 pairs. In addition, the 
number of tools used can be set in parameter No. 13220.
- Display of the spindle positions and wait positions
The spindle position and wait position can be set for each path.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1253 -
12.3.9.2 Displaying and setting tool management screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
Alternatively, press function key several times until the tool management screen appears.
3 Press soft key [TOOL MANAGER].
Fig. 12.3.9.2 (a) Tool management data screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 By using the page keys, cursor keys, and soft keys [←] and [→], move the cursor to the position of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the tool information of the tool number for which you want to set or modify data.
Alternatively, type the tool number of the data you want to set or modify, and press soft key [NO. 
SRH].
5 Press soft key [EDIT]. 
6 To set tool data, type a desired value, then press soft key [INPUT].
To delete tool information, follow the steps below.
<1> In step 4, move the cursor to the tool information you want to erase.
<2> Press soft key [ERASE].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<2> Press soft key [ERASE]. 
<3> Press soft key [CURDAT]. To delete entire tool information, press soft key [ALL].
<4> Press soft key [EXEC]. 
7 To end the edit operation, press soft key [EXIT].
This returns the screen display to the conventional tool management screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1254 -
Fig. 12.3.9.2 (b) Tool management data screen (check function) (10.4-inch display unit)
8 When soft key [CHECK] is pressed, if there are tools with the same number but with different count 
types (count and time), the cursor moves to the tool type number of the smallest tool management 
number in the tool type numbers and a warning message appears.
The warning messages issued by the check function are shown below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<1> For the same type of tools with different count types
L-COUNT TYPE MISMATCH:XXXXXXXX
<2> For the same type of tools with the same count type
L-COUNT TYPE MATCH
Explanation
- Another method
Tool management data, customize data, and names set for tool states can be input/output also by using 
external I/O devices.
See III-8, “DATA I/O”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1255 -
- Displayed information
• Life information
Fig. 12.3.9.2 (c) Tool management data life status screen(10.4-inch display unit)
NO. : Tool management data numbers are displayed. These numbers can be displayed but 
cannot be set. The tool management data number of edited data is kept blinking until 
tool management data edit mode ends. Tool management data numbers set or deleted


key: chroma:document
string_value:
on the magazine screen also blink on the tool management screen.
TYPE NO. : Tool type numbers are displayed.
A value from 0 to 99,999,999 can be set.
MG : The magazine number assigned to each tool is indicated. These numbers can be 
displayed but cannot be set.
POT : The pot number assigned to each tool is indicated. These numbers can be displayed 
but cannot be set.
T-INFO : The following five types of information are displayed sequentially from the right:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Tool management data: Valid (R)/invalid (-))
• Life count type: Time (T)/count (C)
• Tool type: Oversize tool (B)/normal tool (N)
• Data access: Locked (L)/unlocked (U)
• When a tool is not under life management:
Included in the tools to be searched (1)/not included in the tools to be searched (0)
NOTE
1 The tool types and data access information vary depending on the specifications 
defined by the machine tool builder.
2 The same type of tools must have the same life count type.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
L-COUNT : The number of use times/use period of time of each tool is indicated.
Up to 99,999,999 times or 999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds can be set.
MAX-LIFE : The maximum life value of each tool is indicated.
Up to 99,999,999 times or 999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds can be set.
NOTICE-L : Noticed life value of a tool
Up to 99,999,999 times or 999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds can be set.
L-STATE : Current tool state


key: chroma:document
string_value:
L-STATE : Current tool state
One of the four states, including invalid (0), present (1, 2), not present (3), and broken 
(4), is indicated. The numbers in parentheses are data values used when these states 
are input in MDI.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1256 -
• Spindle speed/feedrate
Fig. 12.3.9.2 (d) Tool management data spindle speed/feedrate screen (10.4-inch display unit)
S : Spindle speed.
A value from 0 to 99,999 can be set.
F : Feedrate.
A value from 0 to 99,999,999 can be set.
• Tool offset information
Fig. 12.3.9.2 (e) Tool management data tool offset screen (10.4-inch display unit)
H : Tool length compensation number (for machining center systems only).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A value from 0 to 999 can be set.
D : Cutter compensation number (for machining center systems only).
A value from 0 to 999 can be set.
TG : Tool geometry compensation number (for lathe systems only).
A value from 0 to 999 can be set.
TW : Tool wear compensation number (for lathe systems only).
A value from 0 to 999 can be set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1257 -
The displayed offset data is determined depending on the option configuration and parameter
settings (bits 1(DCR), 2(DOY), 4(DO2), 6(DOT), and 7(DOM) of parameter No. 13202).
• Customize information
Fig. 12.3.9.2 (f) Tool management data customize data screen (10.4-inch display unit)
CUSTOM0 : Bit-type customize information.
For each bit, 1 or 0 can be input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CUSTOM1 to 4 : Customize information. Any value from -99,999,999 to 99,999,999 can be set.
CUSTOM5 to 20 : Customize information. These items are displayed only when customize data 
extension option (5 to 20) of the tool management function is enabled. Any 
value from -99,999,999 to 99,999,999 can be set.
CUSTOM21 to 40 : Customize information. These items are displayed only when customize data 
extension option (5 to 40) of the tool management function is enabled. Any


key: chroma:document
string_value:
value from -99,999,999 to 99,999,999 can be set.
- Tool management data number
Tool management data numbers can optionally be extended to 64, 240, or 1000 pairs. The number of 
tools used can be set in parameter No. 13220.
- Edit mode
To edit data, press soft key [EDIT] to enter tool management data edit mode.
- Life count override
When the period of time is set as the tool life count type, the life count can be overridden if bit 2 (LFV) of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameter No. 6801 is set to 1. Specify an override value by using a switch on the machine operator’s 
panel.
Example)
When cutting is performed for 10 minutes with an override of 0.1, one minute is counted in the tool 
life counter.
- Tool management extension function
When tool management extension functions are enabled, you can use the following functions in addition 
to the tool management functions:
• A value with a decimal point can be set as customize data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1258 -
• Various types of tool management data can be protected using KEY signals.
An attempt to enter a value to a protected data causes a warning message “WRITE PROTECT.”
• Tool life count period selection
Bit 5 of tool information is used to make a life count period selection.
Item Description
Data length 1 byte (flag data)
#5 REV 0: A life count period of 1 sec is used.
1: A life count period of 8 msec is used.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Range of count is as follows.
1sec : 0 to 3,599,999 sec (999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds)
8msec : 0 to 3,599,992 ms (59 minutes 59 seconds 992 milliseconds)
12.3.9.3 Each tool data screen
Each tool data screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
Alternatively, press function key several times until the tool management screen appears.
3 Press soft key [EACH TOOL]. The each tool data screen appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1259 -
Explanation
- Header
The following four data items are displayed: NO., TYPE NO., MG, and POT.
When the data table of a tool extends over two or more pages, the same header is displayed on these 
pages.
- Data table
The data table shows data items related to a tool at a time.
The data items are displayed from the upper left to the lower left, the upper right, and the lower right in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ascending order of screen display position numbers specified using the customize function. The number 
of digits displayed for one data item is fixed to 11.
Up to 24 data items are displayed on one page. (12 data items × 2 columns)
When more than 24 data items are set for a tool, the 25th and subsequent data items are displayed on the 
next page. (Up to three pages)
When a data item is set as a screen element of the tool management data screen twice or more using the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
tool management data display customize function (one of the tool management extension functions), only 
the data item with the smaller display position number is displayed. When no value is set for a data item, 
the field for the data item is not displayed and the next data item is displayed.
Key operations
- MDI key operations
Numeral keys Inputs a numeric value.
Displays the previous page for the same tool.
Displays the next page for the same tool.
Moves the cursor to the previous data item.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the cursor is on the top row of the data table, it moves to the bottom row of the left 
column. When the cursor is on the first data item, it moves to the last data item.
Moves the cursor to the next data item.
When the cursor is on the bottom row of the data table, it moves to the top row of the 
right column. When the cursor is on the last data item, it moves to the first data item.
Moves the cursor left on the screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the cursor is on the left column of the data table, it moves to the right column on 
the row immediately above. When the cursor is on the first data item, it moves to the last 
data item.
Moves the cursor right on the screen.
When the cursor is on the right column of the data table, it moves to the left column on 
the row immediately below. When the cursor is on the last data item, it moves to the first 
data item.
- Soft key operations
Soft key [EDIT]
Enters the management data edit mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Soft key [NO.SRH]
Displays data with a tool management data number when pressed after the tool management data 
number is entered.
Soft key [PREV.TOOL]
Returns to the previous tool management data number.
Soft key [NEXT.TOOL]
Proceeds to the next tool management number.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1260 -
Operation in the management data edit mode
To edit data, press soft key [EDIT] to enter the management data edit mode.
Fig. 12.3.9.3 (b) Each tool data screen (10.4-inch display unit)
In the management data edit mode, “EDITING” is displayed at the lower right of the screen.
In addition to the above key operations, the following key operations are available in the management 
data edit mode:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
data edit mode:
Actually writes a value entered using numeric keys.
Soft key [END]
Ends the management data edit mode.
Operations for editing tool information are the same as those on the tool management data screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1261 -
12.3.9.4 Displaying the total life of tools of the same type
Total life data screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
Alternatively, press key several times until the tool management screen appears.
3 Press soft key [TOTAL LIFE]. The total life data screen appears.
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [CHANGE] to switch the display between total life data of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the count counting type tools and that of the time counting type tools.
Fig. 12.3.9.4 (a) Count display (10.4-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.3.9.4 (b) Time display (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1262 -
Displayed information
S-NO. : Sequential number of each tool type
TYPE NO. : Tool type number
T-REM-LIFE : Total of remaining life values of tools with the same tool type number
T-L-COUNT : Total of used counts/times of tools with the same tool type number
T-MAX-LIFE : Total of maximum life values of tools with the same tool type number
NUM : Number of tools with the same tool type number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
T-NOTICE-L : Total of notice life values of tools with the same tool type number when the tool life 
arrival signal is to be output for each tool type
STATUS : Whether the tool life arrival signal has been output when the signal is to be output for 
each tool type
Either of the two states (UNDONE and DONE) is displayed.
When bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 is set to 0 and bit 2 (TRT) of parameter No. 13200 is set to 1,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the tool life arrival signal is to be output for each tool type number and T-NOTICE-L and STATUS are 
displayed.
Key operations
- MDI key operations
Displays the previous page. The cursor moves to the last data item on that page.
Displays the next page. The cursor moves to the first data item on that page.
Moves the cursor up on the screen.
Moves the cursor down on the screen.
Disabled.
Disabled.
- Soft key operations
Soft key [DETAIL]
Displays the detailed life data screen.
Soft key [UPDATE]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Soft key [UPDATE]
Updates data displayed on the total life data screen.
Soft key [CHANGE]
Switch the display between the count and time types.
Soft key [T-TYPENO. SRH]
Moves the cursor to a tool type number when pressed after the number is entered.
Soft key [T-ASCE -SORT]
Sorts data in ascending order of tool type numbers.
Soft key [T-DESC -SORT]
Sorts data in descending order of tool type numbers.
Soft key [R-ASCE -SORT]
Sorts data in ascending order of remaining life values.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Soft key [R-DESC -SORT]
Sorts data in descending order of remaining life values.
NOTE
1 After soft key [T-ASCE -SORT], [T-DESC -SORT], [R-ASCE -SORT], or 
[R-DESC -SORT] is pressed, the cursor is positioned at the top of page 1 of the 
total life data screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1263 -
NOTE
2 When the power is turned on, data of the count counting type is displayed in 
ascending order of tool type numbers. When the display type is changed or data 
is sorted in a different order, the status is kept.
3 If soft key [DETAIL] is pressed when no data is displayed on the total life data 
screen, the warning message “NO DETAILED LIFE DATA SCREEN” is output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 If an unregistered tool type is specified and soft key [T-TYPENO. SRH] is 
pressed, the warning message “UNREGISTERED NUMBER” is output.
Detailed life data screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
Alternatively, press several times until the tool management screen appears.
3 Press soft key [TOTAL LIFE]. The total life data screen appears.
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [DETAIL]. The detailed life data screen appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 12.3.9.4 (c) Detailed life data screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- Displayed information
TYPE NO. : Tool type number
ORDER : Sequential number in ascending order of remaining life times or the order in which the 
customize data is set.
NO. : Tool management data number
REM-LIFE : Remaining life value obtained by subtracting the life count value from the maximum life 
value
L-COUNT : Total used count or time of the tool
MAX-LIFE : Maximum life value of the tool


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTICE-L : Notice life value of the tool
STATUS : Life status of the tool
One of the four states (NO-MNG (0), ENABLE (1, 2), NONE (3), and DAMAGED (4)) 
is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1264 -
Key operations
- MDI key operations
Displays the previous page.
Displays the next page.
Moves the cursor up on the screen. The cursor moves to the last data item on that page.
Moves the cursor down on the screen. The cursor moves to the first data item on that page.
Disabled.
Disabled.
- Soft key operations
Soft key [UPDATA]
Updates data displayed on the detailed life data screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The cursor is positioned at the beginning of page 1 after this soft key is pressed.
Soft key [CLOSE]
Closes the detailed life data screen and returns to the total life data screen.
NOTE
When soft key [CLOSE] is pressed and the total life data screen is displayed again, 
the cursor on the total life screen data is positioned as follows.
1 When the tools with the tool type number displayed when the detailed data 
screen is closed are registered as tool management data, the cursor on the total


key: chroma:document
string_value:
life screen is positioned at that tool type number.
2 When the tools with the tool type number displayed when the detailed data 
screen is closed are not registered as tool management data, the cursor on the 
total life data screen is positioned at the first total life data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 12. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
- 1265 -
12.3.9.5 Tool geometry data screen
Tool geometry data screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
Alternatively, press several times until the tool management screen appears.
3 Press continuous menu key , then soft key [TOOL-GEOM]. The tool geometry data screen 
appears.
Fig. 12.3.9.5 (a) Tool geometry data screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- Displayed item
NO. : Tool geometry number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NO. : Tool geometry number
Up to 20 numbers can be displayed.
LEFT : Sets the number of pots that are to be occupied on the left of the reference pot.
A value between 0 and 4 can be set.
RIGHT : Sets the number of pots that are to be occupied on the right of the reference pot.
A value between 0 and 4 can be set.
UPPER : Sets the number of pots that are to be occupied above the reference pot.
A value between 0 and 4 can be set. (Use this item when the magazine is of the matrix type.)


